giao an anh 8 bac giang

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.21 MB, 186 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 8

The first semester

Teaching date: 25 / 8 / 2008 .

Period 1

consolidation

A / The aims:

I.Teaching points :Students will be able to remind something about grade 7 and know how 
to learn well in the new school year .

II.Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards ,posters.

B.Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations(2 ) ’ – Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up (7 ) ’ –Rewrite some main grammar structures in grade 7 on the board .
- T asks some Ss to go to the board and rewrite .

- T corrects and give marks .
III. New lesson :

Teacher’s activities Students,activities
I/

II/

Revision :

The tenses :

- Present simple:

S + V( s/es)/ To be (am/ is /are)

- Present progressive :

S + To Be + V_ ing +….

- Simple future :

S + Will/ Shall …

- Near future :

To Be going to….

- Past simple:

S + V( ed/ qkbqt)/To Be( was/ were)....

*Teacher hang a poster, give some forms and uses .
=> Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each tense
Exercise : Change these sentences into other tenses
( Present simple , Present progressive , near future ,
Simple future and Past simple ) and add appropriate

adverbs of time .

1. She is in Grade 7 => ……….
2. They are playing soccer =>………
3. She went to Ha Noi last week =>……….
4. I will visit my sister next week =.>………
5. Mai is going to build a new house .=>………
- Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback

Presenting the English Grade 8

- There are 16 units in this program , each unit has 6
parts Which mention a particular skill such as

Listening . Speaking , Reading and Writing

+ At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “ to
lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up .

-Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to

-Give some forms and
uses

-Listen and repeat the uses
and forms of them

-Copy down
-work individually

-Work in pairs to practice
changing these sentences
into other tenses .

- Some pairs to

demonstrate in front of
class.

Listen to the introduction
Work individually

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

III/
V/
IV/

summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each
one .

Introduce some books , reference books to students
Preparation :

- Ask Ss to prepare Unit 1 “ Getting started + Listen
and read “

Consolidations :- Retell the main contents of this 
lesson.

Homeworks :

-Learn by heart these old forms .
- Redo all exercises in work books.
- Prepare for next lesson.

-Copy down homeworks.
Work individually

Unit 1: My friends

Teaching date:

Period 2

lesson 1 : Getting started

+ language focus 1

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa LAN 
_ Nine and read the dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past tenses .
II. Teaching aids : Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ,poster.

B. Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance

II. Checking up (7 )- ’ Asks Ss to retell 2 tenses to learned in grade 7.
- T corrects and give marks .

III. New lesson :

Teacher’s activities Students,activities
I/

II/
1.

Warm up : Pelmanism

meet come live think send thought
receive met lived received came sent
- Remark and lead in new lesson .

Presentation :
 Pre- reading

a) Pre- teach vocabulary : Introduce the aims and
some new words

- to seem ( translation )

- a next door neighbor : a person who lives next to
your house

- to look like ( translation )

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
b) Pre- questions

Work in groups

Listen and write down .
Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually

Guess its meanings
Copy down

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

IV/

- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in
pairs to answer them

1. Is Nien Lan,s friend or Hoa,s friend ?
2. How old is Nien ?

3. Where does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?
- Give feedback

While

–

reading

:

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
dialogue between Hoa , Lan and Nien . Then
check if their answers are correct or not

*Answers: 1-She is Hoa,s friend .

2- She is 12 years old ./3- She lives in Hue .
4- Yes , she is .

Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the
questions in exercise 2 / page 11

- Have them work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class and correct their mistakes or pronunciation .
- Correct and give feedback :

a) She lives in Hue
b) No , she does not .

c) The sentence is “ She was not old enough to be
in my class. “

d) At Christmas

- Ask them to work in open pairs to practice asking

and answering the questions and the dialogue .
Gap filling : Language focus 1

- Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past
tense to complete the paragraph , using some verbs
: live – send – be – come

Hoa ... in Hue last year , but now she ....in Ha

Noi . Yesterday , Hoa ,s friend Nien ... Hoa a

letter . Nien ... Hoa, neighbor when Hoa lived in

Hue . She ... younger than Hoa . She ... to Ha 
Noi in December .

- Get Ss to work individually and then compare
their answers with their partners .

- Give feedback

lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes .
- Asks Ss do exercise 1(16)

- Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph
in front of class .

Post - reading

:

Writing

- Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan .

- Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple
present or past tense to write individually .

* Cues :

a. Lan / Hoa,s best friend

b. They / same class / Quang Trung School .
c. Last year / Hoa / to school first time .
d. Lan / show / round / introduce / to new

friends .

- Let Ss discuss with their partners .

- Choose some answers and correct them in front
of the class .

Consolidations: - Retell the main points of

this lesson.

Homeworks:

Work in pairs

Listen carefully

Repeat all the correct
answers and copy down

Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Practice asking and

answering the questions and
the dialogue .

Complete the paragraph
individually .

Read the complete
paragraph aloud

Write a paragraph about
Hoa , Lan

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

V/ 1. Rewrite all the answers and complete paragraph
on their notebooks ./ Do Exercise in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson . Listen and copy

Unit 1 : My friends

Teaching date:

Period 3

Lesson 2

: Speak + listen

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points :- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to describe someone .
-Develop Ss’ speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , pictures , chalks, lesson plan ., radio, CD. poster.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance

II. Checking up (7 ) ’ – Asks some ss to go to the board to describe about their friends
- T corrects and give marks .

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

II/

III/
1.

4.
5.

6.
IV/
V/

- Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used to describe
body build and hair .

* Possible answers :

- fat - straight
- slim - long
- tall

- short - Color : black / dark
- overweight blond / fair
- slender brown/grey
Presentation :

- Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to describe
her hair , her body build .

Ex : She has long blond hair
She is short and thin

Form S + have / has + adjective + hair
S + be + adjectives

Practice :
Word cue drill

- Prepare 6 cards so that students can drill easily .
a. He / tall / thin

b. She / short / slim
c. He / short / fat
d. Long / black

e. Curly / blond
f. Straight / brown

- Ask Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Correct and give feedback

a. He is tall and thin .
b. She is short and slim .
c. He is short and fat .
d. She has long black hair .
e. She has curly blond hair .
f. She has straight brown hair .
Practice speaking

- Ask Ss to look at six people in their books .

- Call on a student to describe one person , the others
have to guess who he / she is

* Example :

S1 : This person is short and thin . She has long blond
hair .

S2 : Is this Mary ? - Yes

- Go on until six people on the poster are
described .

- Post speaking :

* Writing

- Ask Ss to write all the sentences they have described
above .

Pre Listening:

-Asks Ss guess and complete the 4 dialogues(12 +13)
while listening:

-Ss listen and check their prediction.
- Some Ss give answer s.

- T gets feedback .
post listening:

T asks Ss practise the dialouge with their partners.

- Ss work in groups of 5

Work in group

Read all the adjectives
aloud .

Look at the picture and
read the example aloud
Copy and give some
examples .

Work individually

Read the sentences aloud .
Practice speaking in front
of class.

-Write their sentences
alone

Listen and copy .
-Guess and gap fill .
- work individually
- Listen to the radio.
Read the dialogue.
- work in pairs

body build / hairs

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

Unit 1: My friends

Teaching date:

Period 4

Lesson 3 :

Read

A /The aims :

I.Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Ba,s friend. 
- Develop Ss’ reading skill.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , board, lesson plan ,posters.

B/ Steps of the lesson

:

I. Organization : Greeting and checking attendance.
II. Checking up :- In the new lesson and give them marks.
III. New lesson:

****

*
1.

Warm up : * Chatting

Ask Ss to look at four pictures on page 10 and talk
about the activities they want to do after school or in
their free time and ask some questions :

1.What are these students doing ?

(play soccer / play chess /read books /play volleyball )
2. What time of the day do you think it is ?

( in the morning / evening , after school )
3. Do you like soccer / reading books ...?
4. Whom do you like playing with ?

- Correct mistakes if any and lead in the new lesson .

Pre - reading : Introduce the aims and some new 
words to students

Pre- teach( vocabulary) : 
- a character ( translation )

- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live

- reserved (adj)
- sociable (adj)

- to tell jokes = to tell a story which makes people
laugh

- (a) sense of humor ( translation )

* Checking vocabulary : What and where

- Write the word on the board , put one word in each
circle

T/F statements predictions

- Stick the poster of T / F statements are about Ba and
his friends , read them and guess which statements are
true , which are false :

a. Ba only has three friends – Bao , Song , Khai .
b. Ba and his friends have the same characters .

c. Bao – Song – Khai are quite reserved in public .
d. They all enjoy school and study hard .

- Get Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - reading

- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text carefully
and check their predictions :

- Give feedback a. F b. F c. F d. T

Work in groups

Listen carefully
Listen and repeat
Guess its meanings and
copy

Play games

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

***

IV/
V/

- Ask Ss to correct the false statements
* Correction:

a. Ba has a lot of friends , but he spends most of his
time with Bao , Song . Khai .

b. They have different characters .

c. Only Song and Khai are quite reserved .
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud
* Choose the best answer and write :
- Explain the meanings of the phrases :

+ does not affect his school work : không ảnh hëng tíi
viƯc häc

+ rather shy : h¬i nhót nhát
+ get tired of : nhàm chán

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to choose the best answers .
- Call on some pairs to report their answers

- Listen and correct . Then give feed back
a. A b. C c . B d. D
* Now answer the questions :

- Let Ss read the text again and work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs of students to ask and answer the
questions

- Correct and give feedback

a. He feels lucky having a lot of friends .
b. Bao is the most sociable

c. Khai likes reading

d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends .

e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at
local orphanage .

- Let Ss practice asking and answering the questions in
open pairs .

* Post - reading :

- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk to one another
about their friends , using the adjectives they have just
learnt to describe .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class.
Consolidation : -Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework : 1. Write a paragraph about one close 
friend ( about 50 words )

2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

their predictions

Correct the false
statements and copy
Read the text aloud
( 3 Ss )
Listen and copy down

Work in pairs to do the
exercise

Read their answers aloud
Copy down

-Practice asking and
answering the questions

Copy the right answers

Work in groups to talk
about their friends
Demonstrate in front of
class.

Listen and copy

Unit 1: My friends

Teaching date:

Period 5

Lesson 4:

writing

A / The aims

:

I. Teaching points:-By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a paragraph about their 
close friends.

- Develop Ss’ writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : - Lesson plan , poster, textbooks, cues.

B / Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance .

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

III.New lesson :
**

I/

keys:

II/

III/

IV/
V/

Warm up 
 ** Slap the board

( Using the words they have learnt in the previous lesson )

Pre - writing :

* Reading :

- Ask Ss to read the information about Tam , then
answer some questions .

a. What is his name ?
b. How old is he ?

c. What does he look like ?
d. What is he like ?

e. Where does he live ?
f. Whom does he live with ?
g. Who is his friend ?

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .

- Correct and give feedback .
a. Le Van Tam

b. He is 14

c. he is tall and thin . He has short black hair .
d. He is sociable , humorous and helpful
e. He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi .

f . He lives with his mother and an elder brother .
g . Ba and Bao

While - writing :

- Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam , using the
information they have just got .

- Work individually . Then compare with the paragraph
in their books .

- Ask Ss to write some information about one of their
friends , then write a paragraph about her / him .
- Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if
possible .

* Sample :

His / her name ... . He / she is ...

years old . He / she ...lives at ... in ... with
... He / she is ... . He / she

has ...hair . He / she is ...helpful . 
He / she has ... friends , but his / her close

friends are ... and ... .

- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
 Post - writing :

- Ask Ss to write a similar paragraph about himself /
her self

- Go around the class and help Ss , then ask some Ss to
speak in front of class a bout himself / herself.

Consolidation :

- Retell the main points of this lesson .
Homework :

1. Write a paragraph about one of their family
members .

2. Learn by heart vocabulary and main points .
3 . Prepare the next lesson .

Play games

Read the information
about Tam .

Practice asking and
answering the questions

Write a paragraph about
Tam individually

Read their writings aloud .
Write another paragraph ,
using the sample .

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Write about himself /
herself .

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

Unit 1 : My friends

Teaching date

Period 6

Lesson 5:

Language focus

A/ The aims :

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to review the simple present tense to 
talk about general truths and write some sentences , using the structure “ (not) + adjectives enough +
to infinitive

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards , posters ..

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizations : Greeting and checking attendance .

II . Checking up : check in the new lesson and give them marks .

III. New lesson :

II/
1.

Warm up : * Kim,s game

( Using language focus 3 )

- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly .
Then let them keep their books closed .

- Divide the class into four groups .

- Give Ss two questions , the group which answers
correctly the fastest wins the game .

* Questions:

a. How many people are there in the picture ?
( Four )

b. What is each person wearing ?

- The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green dress.
- The man who is standing beside the car is wearing

brown trousers and a yellow shirt .

- The man who is standing on the pavement is wearing
a pink shirt and blue trousers .

- The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt .
Presentation :

Grammar :

a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)

…

.

eg: I go on holiday twice a year.

* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used
to express an action which is always true .

b. Past simple :

S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + ….

eg:I missed the train this morning .

. (not) adjective + enough + to

–

infinitive

Eg: He is old enough to see that film .

- Play game in two teams
Ss answer the T’s

questions

Listen and copy

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

2.
*

***

IV/
V/

She is not clever enough to do this thing .

Exercises

Ex 1: Complete the paragraphs . Use the correct form 
of the verbs in brackets

- Ask Ss to work individually and then compare their
answers with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback

a. 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is

b. 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced

Ex 2 : Complete the dialogue .

- Explain some new words :

+ a planet : the sun , the moon , the earth ...
+ Mars / Mercury ( translation )

+ silly ( adj) ( translation )

- Ask them to read the words in the box .

- Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan
, his young cousin .

- Call on some pairs to practice the complete dialogue .
- Correct their pronunciation and give feedback .
* keys :

1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is

Ex 4 : Set the scene to introduce the aims of the

exercise :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue
- Correct and give feedback

a. not big enough
b. not old enough
c. strong enough
d. good enough
Consolidation:

- Retell the main contents of this lesson .
 Homework :

1. Ask Ss to write five sentences about themselves
, using the structure : (not) + adjective enough +
to – infinitive .

2. Prepare the next lesson

Work individually

Read their answers aloud .
Copy down

Listen and copy

Read the words in the box
and complete the dialogue
.

Practice the dialogue
Copy down

-complete the dialogue

Listen carefully .
Work in pairs

Practice the dialogues
-work in pairs .

-Some Ss to retell the
main points

Listen and copy .

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date:

Period 7

lesson 1

: Getting started

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

A/ The aims:

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the telephone to make 
and confirm arrangements .

- Develop Ss’speaking and listening skills .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks, poster , pictures , radio , CD, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations : - Greeting

and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks Ss to describe the picture , talk about some person in that .

eg :The man is standing next to the car , He is wearing yellow shirt . He is tall and fat .
…

- T corrects and give them marks .

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

II/
1.

2.
*

***

* Answers :

a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone

c. a fax machine

d. a telephone directory

e. a public telephone
f. an address book

- Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and
ask Ss to match the object with its definition .

* Definition :
1. to send fax

2. to find someone ,s telephone number 
3. to write address and telephone numbers
4. to make a phone call in street telephone box .
5. to leave and take messages

6. to make phone call anywhere you like
* Answers : a-5 b-6 c-1 d-2 e- 4 f-3
Pre-teach :

* Elicits and present some words :

- (to) hold on : doi may nhe, giu may cho nhe.
-(to) bit far / alittle bit far : hoi hoi xa, kha xa .
-(an) arrangement : su sap xep .

- ( to ) agree :
 Pre- reading :
 Open prediction :

- Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone
. They are talking about going to see a movie “

- Ask Ss to guess :
a. Who made the call ?
b. Who introduced herself ?

c. Who invented the other to the movies ?
d. Who arranged a meeting place ?

e. Who arranged the time ?
f. Who agreed to the time ?

- Have them work in pairs to guess the answers .
- Call on some pairs to report the answers and write
them on the board .

While – reading :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
conversation between Nga and Hoa , then give them
feedback .

* Answers :

a. Nga made the call
b. Nga introduced herself .

c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies .
d. Nga arranged a meeting place .
e. Hoa arranged the time .

f. Nga agreed the time .

- Get some Ss to read the conversation aloud . Correct
pronunciation if any

Comprehension questions :

- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in pairs
to answer them . ( T. hang a poster on the board )
1. What is Hoa,s telephone number ?

2. Which movie are they going to see ? Where ?
3. How is Hoa going to see the movies ?

4. Where are they going to meet ? What time ?
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Remark and give feedback .

* Possible answer :

1. Her telephone number is 3847329.

2. They are going to see the movie Dream City at Sao
Mai Movie Theater .

(table )

- Match each object with
its name

- Give answer keys

Listen and copy down
- Works individually.

-Copy down new words .
- Repeat in chorus

-Listen to teacher sets the
scene .

-Ss guess and answer the
questions .

- Work in pairs.

Work in pairs

Read their predictions

Listen to the tape , read
the conversation to check
their predictions

Practice asking and
answering the questions
- Work in pairs.

Read the conversations
aloud ( in pairs )

Answer the questions.
Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of
class .

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date:12/9/2008

Period 8

Lesson 2

: Speak

language focus 1+2

A /The aims :

I. Teaching points :

- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk on the phone about intentions with “ Going 
To”

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cards , chalks , .lesson plan , posters.

B / Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance .
II. Checking up : -T asks some questions :

1. Have you got a telephone ?

2. Do you have a telephone at your home ?
3. What is your telephone mumber?

- T corrects and give them marks .
III. New lesson :

II/
1.

Warm up : * Chatting

- Talk to Ss to about using telephone .
1. Do you have a telephone at home ?
2. How often do you make a phone call ?

3. What would you say when you pick up the phone to
answer it ?

4. What would you say if you are the caller ?

Presentation :

Pre- speaking

- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the sentences in

the correct order to make a complete conversation .
- Call on some pairs to read their answers and write
them on the board :

* Answers : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c
7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d

- Call on some pairs to practice the conversation they
have arranged .

-Ask Ss some questions to check Ss,understanding and 
focus on the structure GOING TO

a. Are they talking on the phone ?
b. What do they intend to do ?

c. What time are they meeting ? Where ?

d. What form of the verbs do you use to talk about

-Some ss to answer the T’s
questions

Work in whole class

Work in pairs

Report their answers

Practice the complete

dialogue

- Work in pairs
+ Yes , they are

+ They intend to go to the
pop concert

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

III/
***

*4.

intentions ?

=> S + BE + GOING TO + Infinitive
=> Express an intention

While - speaking :

- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making arrangements
to play chess “

- Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao to
practice the dialogue .

- Listen and give feedback
Ba : Hello . 8257012

Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao .
Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?

Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ? 
Ba : Great . Me too.

Bao : can you play chess tonight ?

Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess tonight . I am
going to do my homework .

Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ? 
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .

Bao : I ll meet you at the Center Chess Club .’

Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok . Let ,s meet at the 
front door .

Bao : Is 2,00, OK ?

Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00 o,clock .

Post – speaking : - Ask Ss to make similar dialogue .
T can emphasise (nhan manh )the useful phrases and
sentences

-- Ask Ss to make similar arrangements and practice
talking with a partner .

-Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to + Infinitive “

Practice :

Model sentences :

Are you going to see a movie ?

Yes , I am / No , I am not .

*Word cue drill :

a. see a movie ( Yes )
b. play / sports ( No )
c. meet your friends ( Yes)
d. help your mother ( Yes )
e. do your homework (No)
f. watch TV ( No )

- Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat chorally then
individually .

- Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs.

Language focus 1+2 :

*Ask ss to do ex 1 (25 )

eg : Nga has a movie ticket ( What is she going to do?)
 She is going to see a movie .

T . gets feedback and give answer keys .

* Ex 2 ( 25 ) – Ssplay a game : Find someone who …

T asks :

What are you going to do on the weekend ?

Are you going to …. ?

+ … meet your friends ?

+ be going to

Listen and copy down.
- work individually.
Listen to teacher carefully
.

Work in pairs

Practice the complete
dialogue

- Work in groups of 3 or 4

Make similar dialogue .

- work in dividually

Practice asking and
answering

- work in pairs .

- Do exercises 1 (25 )
work in pairs

Do ex 2 (25) .
- Play a game

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

IV/
V/

+…. see a movie ?
+ ….play football ?
+….help your parents ?
+… do ur homeworks ?

+… listen to music/ watch T.V…?.
-T gets feedback .

Consolidations :

Retell contents of this lesson.
Homework :

1.Write five things that they intend to do next week .

And learn by heart main structure grammar .

2.Do exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

some questions .
- Give the result, Talk
loudly . Others listen to
and corrects mistakes .
- Work individually.

- Some Ss to retell the
main contents.

Listen and copy .down
homeworks.

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date:15/9/2008

Period 9

Lesson 3

:

Listen

+ language focus 3

A / The aims:

I . Teaching points:By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a telephone message

by listening .

-Listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , postres, lesson plan.

B / Steps of the lesson :

I . Organizations

: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :

- Checking in the contents of the new lesson .

- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

I/ Warm up : * Telephone transmitting
- Divide Ss into two teams .

- Choose 6 volunteers from each team

- the volunteers stand in two lines . T. shows the first
student a telephone number .

- He / She whispers the telephone number to the next

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

II/
1.

IV/
V/

- The second student whispers to the third ... until the
last one .

- The last student has to shout out the number , if it is
the same as the number teacher shows , that team wins
the match .

New lesson : 
Revision words:

- Junior high school :Truong THCS _ cap 2
- The principal : hieu truong .

- (to) wanted

- at the moment : ngay lap tuc, 1luc
- (an) appointment: cuoc hen gap

- available : san co, co hieu luc, co gia tri, co mat.
. Pre- listening :

- Ask Ss to look at the form of the telephone message
on page 21 and set the scene “ a woman phoned the
principal of Kingston junior high school , but he was

out .”

- Have Ss guess the message .
- Let Ss work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - listening :

- Turn on the tape twice and ask Ss to fill in the
message , compare with their predictions .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers after checking .
- T give them marks

* Answers :

Kingston junior high school
Date : ...Time : ...

For : The principal

Message : Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9 .
45 in the morning

Telephone number : 6463720942.

T. corrects and gives answer keys.

- Call on some Ss to read them aloud , Tgive them
marks

Post - listening :

- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the information they
have heard

- Go around the class and help them .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue they have
made .

Consolidations :

- Retell the main points of this lesson .

Homework :

1. Copy the dialogue above .
2. Do exercise in workbook .

3. Learn by heart the main points and new words.
4. Prepare the next lesson .

Look at the form of the
telephone message and
listen to the scene
Guess the message
Read their predictions
Listen to tape carefully ,

compare with their
predictions .

- work in pairs.

Read their answers

Work in pairs to make
dialogue .

Practice in front of class
Listen and copy down.
work individually.
- Make a dialogue .
-work individually.

Some Ss Retell the main
contents.

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date: 16 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 10 Lesson 4

: Read

A / The aims :

I.Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Alexander
Graham Bell .

- Ss reading for specific ( ro rang , cu the .chi tiet)information about Alex . G .B .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bill , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations :

- Greeting and asks some questions.

II.Checking up :

- Asks some Ss to say new words , meaning of these words

- T corrects mistakes and gives them marks.

III.New lesson :

II/
1.

Warm up : * Brainstorming

- Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board
and write :

To chat with friend

+ What is the mobile phone used for ?

 Possible answers :

- to have a message
- to call someone
- to make arrangements

- to talk to a person who lives far from
- to get information at the airport or railway

station quickly
Pre - reading :

- Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss .
.Pre teach( vocabulary) :

- to emigrate = to go another country to live ( xuat
canh, di cu)

(

emigrant:: nguoi xuat canh,song dinh cu o nc ngoai)

- to transmit ( translation )Truyen phat tin hieu.
- to conduct = to carry out:thuc hien, tien hanh, chi
dao, dieu hanh.

- to demonstrate ( translation )= perform.
- a device ( translation ): thiet bi, may moc,

- deaf – mute( adj) = a person who is unable to hear
and speak : tat cam diec..

* Checking vocabulary : What and where

T / F statements prediction :

- Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board and
ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are
true or false .

.a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA
……

.b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a
……

hospital in Boston .

.c. Thomas Watson was Bell

…… ,s assistant.

...d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in
…

1877 .

Play games in 2 teams

Read their answers aloud
and copy .

Listen carefully
Listen and repeat in

chorus , then

individually .

Guess its meanings
Copy down

Play game

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

III/
*

IV/

V/
VI/

e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of
……

exhibitions .

- Call on some pairs to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - reading : 
* True or false :

-Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their
books to read the text , then check their prediction

Guess Answer Correction

a F He was born in Edinburgh in Scotland

b F He worked with deaf – mute patients
at Boston University

c T

d F He introduced telephone in 1876

e F He experimented with ways of

transmitting speech over a long distance

f T

- Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud .
* Ordering :

- Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of
Bell,s life , then put them in the correct order .

- Have them compare with their partners
- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Corrects and give feedback

= > Alexander Graham Bell
1. Was born in Scotland
2. went to live in Canada
3. went to live in the USA

4. worked with people who could neither speak
nor hear

5. worked with Thomas Watson

6. successfully demonstrate his invention
7. invented the telephone .

- Call on some Ss to read all the correct order
sentences aloud .

Post - reading : * Write it up :

- Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,s life , using 
the information from the text .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front
of class .

- Correct mistakes if any and give Suggestions .
Consolidations:

-Retell the main contents of this lesson.
 Homework :

1. Copy down their writings .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

work in pairs to predict .

Read their predictions
Listen , read the text , then
check their predictions .
-work in pairs.

- Correct the false ones
(one by one.)

Read them aloud
Do the exercise
Read their answers
work in pairs.

-Read their correct
sentences aloud
-Write individually .

Compare with their
partners .

Read their writings aloud .

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date: 19 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 11

-

lesson 5

:

write

A

/ The aims :

I/ Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a telephone message .
- Develop Ss’ wrinting skill.

II/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , lesson plan, ...

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I/ Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance .

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

I/

***

II/
1.

**
Keys:

2

eg:

III/

- customer • su phuc vu
- furniture • loi nhan, tin nhan
- stationery • khach hang

- midday • van phong pham
- service • buoi trua, giua ngay.
- message • do dac.

+ T. corrects the mistakes.
 Pre - writing : * .Chatting :

– Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message
 Have you ever taken a message ,

 When you take a message , what should be
mentioned in the message ?

( Date , time who sent , to whom , content )
 Pre – teach( vocabulary ):

- (a) customer = a person who comes to buy something
at a shop .

- (a) delivery : su giao hang (Trans…)

- stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers .. ): van
phong pham.

- (to) pick somebody up :don ai bang phuong tien gi …
- (to) taken by :dc nhan boi .

- (to) reach : den, toi gap.

* Checking vocabulary : Rubout and remember
 While - writing :

Reading and gap filling

- Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in the
message .

- Ask them to work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
Corrects and give feedback .

A customer phoned/telephoned the Thang Loi

Delivery Service on May 12 just before midday . She

wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So Mr Tam
took a message for Mr Ha . The customer,s name was

Mrs . Lien and she wanted to know about her furniture

delivery . She wanted Mr Ha to call her . She said Mr 
Ha could reach her number 8645141 after lunch . 
- Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get information and
write the message .

- Let Ss write individually then share with a partner .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers

- Correct and give feedback .
Write :

- Asks Ss to write a message using the

informations from the passage in write (23).
- Asks Ss to share with other groups .

- T. hang some posters of their on the bb.

Thanh Cong Delivery Service

Date : June 16 
Time : After midday 
For : Mrs Van

Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery 
order . He wanted you to call him at 8634082
Taken by : Mr Toan .

- Ask Ss to write another message , using the scene “
Tom phoned Nancy , but she was out . Lisa , Nancy ,s 
sister took a message for Nancy . Help Lisa to write a

message “

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and Tom
then , write the message .

- Let Ss work in pairs .

Play game

Practice asking and
answering the questions
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings
Copy down

Play games

Read and do the exercise .

Read their answers aloud
- Work in pairs .

Read the information and
write the message .
Read their answers

Copy down

Write a message , using

the information .

Read the dialogue .
Work in pairs

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Unit 2

Making arrangements

Teaching date: 22 / 9 /2008 .

Period 12

:

Revision

A / The aims :

I/ Teaching points : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about intentions with

be going to and know how to use Adverbs of place .

- Revision all structure grammar in the old lesson .

II/ Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , chalks, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : Checking in the New lesson ( asks them to do exercises )
III. New lesson :

I/
II/
1/

Ex1:
Eg:

Ex2:

2/

Ex3:

Warm up :

Telephone transmitting

New lesson :

1.Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce the

form and use of going to

- Form : S + be going to + infinitive 
- Use : express an intention

Ex 1 :

- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 . They have to work
with a partner and say what the people are

going to do .

T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is she going to do ? 
S : She is going to see a movie .

- Call on some pairs to read their sentences aloud .
- Correct and give feedback :

a. They are going fishing

b. She is going to read the new model
c. She is going to do her homework .

d.He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight.
e. She is going to give him a birthday present .

Ex 2 : Complete the list ( Questionnaire ) 
a) Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Listen and give feedback .

b) Get Ss to work in pairs

- Have some pairs demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback .

Adverbs of place * Jumbled words

- Let Ss work individually , one student one word

1. tdeousi = outside / 2. siiden = inside
3. hetre = there / 4. erhe = here
5. stupairs = upstairs .

6. wonstaird = downstairs

- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the meanings
words .

- Call on some Ss to read all the adverbs aloud .
Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles . Use each 
adverb in the box once .

- Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and seek with his
cousin , Mr Tuan “

- Let Ss work in pairs , then compare with another pair
( at their table )

- Call on some Ss to read out the speech bubbles
- Give feedback

Play game

Listen and copy down

Work in pairs

Read the example

Read their complete
sentences

Work in pairs

Stick in column “You “
and Your partner

- Demonstrate in front of
class .

Work individually , one
student one word

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

Ex4:

III/ 
IV/

a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs 
b. No , he is not here .

c. He is not downstairs and he is not upstairs .
d. Perhaps , he is outside .

e. No , he is not there .

f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba.

- Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences

Use the key words to write meaningful sentences with BE
GOING TO.

Eg: He /be /ready /five.

=>He’s going to be ready at five.

1. men / repair / roof / house /next week.
=>………
2. teacher / explain / next lesson / us / tomorrow .
=>………
3. Mrs.Johnson / wear / new dress / this / evening ?.
=>………
4. Browns / buy /new house / this year .

=>………
5. My family / visit / my grandparents / Nha trang /
next month.

=>………
6. We / listen / that radio program / this evening .
=>………
7. I / ask / Mr.Wilson / his / advice / this matter.
=>………
8. They / build / new house / here / August.?
Consolidation :

- Retell the main contents of this lesson .
 Homework :

1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks .
2. Write six sentences about your house , using
adverbs of place .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen to the scene .
Work in pairs
Read out the speech
bubbles

Read the complete
sentences aloud .
Copy down .
Do exercise 4 .

- Work in pairs then
go to the board to
rewrite the

sentence, using “
be going to “.
- One by one to go

to the board.
- The others write

down on their
notebooks.

-Retell the main points.
Copy down homeworks.

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: 26 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 13:

lesson 1

: Getting started + Listen and read

Language focus 3.

A/ The aims :

I . Teaching points : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue 
and use modal verbs to talk about the housework .

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , pictures, postes, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization : - Greetinmg and checking attendance .
II. Checking up :

-T. asks Ss some questions :

-What did you do to help your mom after school?
- Asks some Ss to answer the questions .

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- cook meas / wash clothes / Tidy up / Feed the chicken / sweep the floor….

III. New lesson :
***

I/
1.

II/
*Form:

***
III/
**

IV/
V/

Warm up : * Kim,s game ( Getting started )

- Show 6 pictures to Ss and ask them to look at 6
pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember
the verbs in the pictures as many as possible

- Which team remembering more verbs is the winner.
 Answer :

a. Wash dishes / do the washing up

b. Make the bed / to fold the clothes neatly( gap quan
ao ngay ngan)

c. Sweep the floor ./d. Cook / e. Tidy up
f. Feed the chicken

* Presentation : Introduce the topic of the passage 
and some new words

* Pre- teach (Vocabulary ):

- (a) steamer : noi hap, noi dun hoi.
-( a) cupboard : chan , tủ chạn
-( a) saucepan : chảo

- chore (n) : viec vat trong nha, cong viec noi tro.
-( a) sink : bon rua, chau rua.

* Checking techniques : What and where

- Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his
mother , Mrs Vui .

- Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has to
do .

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books
and read their complete sentences :

* Nam has to:

- cook dinner .

- go to the market to buy fish and vegestables.
 - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask her to meet his 
mother at grandma,s house .

Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive

Model : What do you have to do ? 
I must do the washing up .
-> Use the picture cues drill :

a. do the washing up / b. make the bed
c. sweep the floor /d. cook dinner
e. tidy my room / f. feed the chickens .
- Call on some Ss to practice in front of class
* Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs .

Language focus 3 :

- Reflexive pronouns :

Form: I -> myself./ We -> ourselves /

…

Usage :

Ex ercise: Asks Ss to do exercise 3 (35).

Complete the dialogues.

T. corrects and give answer keys.

+ Production :

- Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they have to do

on Sundays .

Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to tidy

my room ...

- Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of
class.

- Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy .
Consolidation:

Play game

_ Some Ss stand up and
speak loudly.

- Copy new lesson.
- read in chorus.
Listen and copy down .
Repeat in chorus and
individually

Guess its meanings and
copy

Play game
Listen carefully

Listen to the tape while

looking at their books .
Read their sentences they
have completed

Copy and give examples

Practice in pairs

Read the dialogue in pairs
.

Write individually

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- Retell the main contents of this leson .
 Homework :

1. Learn by heart all new words they have learnt .
2. Do their exercises in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and copydown
homeworks .

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: 27 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 14

Lesson 2

: Speak.

A/ The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the prepositions of places
to talk about the positions in the house .

- Develop’s Ss speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids : Pictures , chalks , leson plan, poster.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up :Asks some Ss to retell the new words of last lesson.
- T. corrects and give marks.

III. New lesson : 
***

II/

Warm up : * Kim,sgame

- Devide the class into 2 teams

- Show the picture of a chicken to Ss .
- Ask them to study the things in the picture

- Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as
many things as they can remember .

- Which team having more things win games .
 Pre - Speaking :

- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures .
Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge .
Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl .
Where is the flowers ? They are on the table .

Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of fruit .
Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the
counter .

Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under
the cupboard .

Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to
the bowl of fruit .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .

While - speaking :

- Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of
each item

Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove . -
Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback :

+ The sink is next to the stove .

Play game

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

III/

***

IV/
V/

+ The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter .
+ The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard .
+ The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the
dish rack .

+ The clock is on the wall , above the fridge .
+ The flowers are on the table .

- Ask them to read all the suggested sentences aloud .
 Post - speaking :

- Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture
for her living room , but she can not decide
where to put it . You should help her to arrange
the furniture”

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about their
ideas .

 Ask Ss to practice speaking :
- If they agree , they may use :

You are right

- If they disagree , they may use :

No , I think we ,d better / ought to put ...
I think it should be ...

Example :

- Let us put the clock on the wall , between the shelf
and the picture .

- OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on
the shelf …..

- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .

Consolidation : - Retell the main contents of this 
lesson.

Homework :

1. Describe their living room or bedroom .
2. Do exercise in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in pairs

Read all the sentences
aloud .

Listen carefully .

Copy down

Read the examples

Practice speaking .
Listen and copy .

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: 29 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 15

lesson 3

: Listen

A/ The aims :

I .Teching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to identify the right item by

listening .

- Develop Ss listening skill.

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

B / Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance .
II. Checking up :

- Asks Ss complete the list of things Nam has to do ex2 ( 28 ) – 2 Students to talk.
- Two others Use “ought to” to give advice b- d (35).

+ T corrects and give answer keys .=> give them marks .

* Keys ( possible answer):

1) - He has to go to the market to buy fish and vegetables.

- He has to call Aunt Chi ask her to meet his mother at his grandma’s house .
2) – b- You ought to get up earlier.

- d – You ought to go to a dentist .
III. New lesson :

***

II/

III/

Warm up : *

Bingo

- Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5
things you can eat .

- Prepare a list of food . Then call out each word
in a loud voice .

- Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone has
the same things , they cross them out . The first
person crossing out all 5 things shouts “ Bingo “
and wins the game .

 Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake ,
candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham ,
peas ...

Pre - listening : 
* Predictions :

- Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they use
to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “

- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on
the board .

While - listening :

- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them to check their
predictions .

- Give feedback
a. Fired Rice
b. Pan

c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas .

- Turn on the tape once more to check the answers
again .

Post - listening : Mapped dialogue

- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to
make a dialogue by listening the tape again .

Lan : Can I help ..., Mom ?

Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ...
Use the big pan please .

Lan : ...?

Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then fry
the garlic and the green peppers .

Lan : ...?

Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s 
teaspoon of salt in .

Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ... .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of class .

Play game

-Look at their books and
guess 4 things , they use
to cook the “ Special
Chinese Fried Rice “
- Read their predictions
Listen to the tape
carefully to check their
predictions .

Copy the answers .
Listen and check once
more .

Listen individually

Practice in pairs to make a
dialogue .

Work inpairs

Practice in front of class

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

IV/
V/

- Correct pronunciations if any .
Consolidations:

Retell the main points of this lesson.
 Homework :

1. Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks .
2. Do exercise ... in workbook .

3 . Prepare the next lesson .

- Work individually
- copy down homeworks.

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: 30 / 9 / 2008 .

Period 16

Lesson 4

: Read

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points

: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the safety
precautions in the house and use Why- because .

- Develop Ss’ reading skill.

II. Teaching aids

: Textbooks , Cassette , pictures , realias , lesson plan

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization

: Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

Asks Ss talk some steps to make the “Special Chinese Fried Rice”.
- T corrects and give them marks

*Possible answers :

1.Put the little oil in the big pan.
2. Heat the pan.

3. Fry the garlic and the green peppers.
4. Put the ham and peas in .

5. Put the rice and teaspoon of salt in .

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

I/
***

***

II/
1.

III/

drug / electricity / boiling water / fire / gas /
knife./ bead / glass …

Things danger

in home for children.

- Ask them to copy down .

Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 
reading and some new words to Ss

Pre – teach vocabulary :

- a precaution = sự phòng ngừa , sự đè phòng
- a socket ( realia ) / a bead : vat tron nho
- a match ( realia )

- an object = vật , đồ vật
- safety (n ) = sự an toàn
- to destroy = phá huỷ

- to injure ( situation ) : Gay thuong tich
* Checking : Slap the board

True / false statements predictions

- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is

true , which is false .

Statements Guess Key

1. It is safe to leave medicine
around the house .

2. Drugs can look like candy .
3. A kitchen is a suitable place to
play .

4. Playing with one match can
not start a fife .

5. Putting a knife into an
electrical socket is dangerous .
6. Young children do not

understand that many house hold
objects are dangerous .

F
T
F
F
T
T

- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them

on the board .

While - reading : 
Reading the text :

- Turn on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their
prediction.

- Have them correct the statements which are false
1. It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards .
3. A kitchen is dangerous place to play .

4. Playing with one match can cause fire.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud ( 2 Ss )
2. Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of
these questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .

- Give feedback

a. Because children often try to eat and drink them
b Because the kitchen is a dangerous place to place
c. Because playing with one match can cause fire .
d. Because children often try to put something into
electrical sockets and electricity can kill .

e. Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill
children .

Post - Reading : * Discussion

- Ask Ss to work in groups,discussing about the topic .
1. Safety precautions in the street .

2. Safety precautions at school .

Play game in two teams

Write down

Listen to the topic .

Listen and repeat in
chorus and individually
Guess its meaning s and
copy

Play game in 2 teams
Read and predict

Read their predictions
aloud .

Listen to the tape . look at
the poster to check their
predictions .

- Correct the false ones .
- Read the aloud

Practice asking and
answering the questions

Work in groups to discuss
about the topic .

- Demonstrate in front of
class.

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: 03 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 17

lesson 5 :

write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a description of a
room in their house .

- Develop Ss writing skill .

II. Teaching aids :

Textbooks , chalks , board , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization :

Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

Asks 2 Ss to say some things danger in home for children.
- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

I/
1.

II/

Warm up : *

Chatting

( Asking something about the room on page 32 )

1. Which room is this ?

2. What is this ? / Where is it ?

Pre - writing : Introduce the aims and some new 
words to Ss :

Pre- teach vocabulary :

- folder (n)bia (dung de cat dan thu cong)
- beneath : (pre) Khoang duoi > < above.

- dish rack (n) gia de bat dia.

- lighting fixture (n) den chum

- Container : (n) cai dung , cai chua ( chai , lo, binh…)
* Checking : Rub out and remember

Reading

- Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,sroom , then 
ask some comprehension questions

a. What is there on the left of the room ?
b. Where is the bookshelf ?

c. What is there on the right side of the room ?
d. Where is the wardrobe ?

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback :

a. There is a desk on the left of the room .
b. The bookshelf is above the desk .

c. There is a window on the right side of the room .
d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite the
desk .

- Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,s 
room aloud .

While - writing :

- Ask Ss to describe Hoa,s kitchen , using the given 
cues .

- Ask Ss to share with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front
of class .

- Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if any .
- Give feedback

This is Hoa,s kitchen .

There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the

Play game

Listen and copy the title
of the lesson .

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .

Play game

Read the description and
practice asking and
answering the questions
- work in pairs.

Read the description aloud
.

Work individually
Compare with their
friends

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

III/

IV/
V/

room .

Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven 
On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and 
next to the sink is a towel rack .

The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right of 
the window and beneath the selves .

On the selves and on the counter beneath the 
window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . 
In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and 
four chairs .

The lighting fixture is above the table , and directly 
beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers .

- Call on some Ss to read the completed descriptions
aloud .

Post- writing : * Speaking

- Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room /
living room / kitchen .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in
front of class .

Consolidation:

- Retell the main contents of this lesoon.

Homework :

1. Write a description of their living room .
2. Do exercises in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .
* Feedback :

- Describe the
Hoa’skitchen.
- Work individually.

Read the completed
writing aloud .
(one by one)
Practice speaking .
Demonstrate in front of
class .

Listen and copy

Unit 3

At home

Teaching date: O4 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 18

lesson 6

: Language focus

A/ The aims :

I. Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the Reflexive

Pronouns , modal verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use Why - Because .

II.Teaching aids :

Textbook , boards , chalks , lesson plan,posters.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization:

- Greeting and Ask some questions.

II. Checking up

: T. asks some Qs in Ex2 (32).
- Ss answer the questions.

- T. corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :

*** Warm up : * Brainstorming 
- tidy up

- do our homework
Things you - cook

can do - water flower
- clean the floor
- repair the machine
- fix the TV set

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

I/
1.

II/
**

Things you - paint the house
can not do -

- Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “
- Listen and correct mistakes if any
 Language focus :

1. Reflexive pronouns

- Set the scene “ You do your homework and no one
helps you . What do you say ? “

I did my homework myself .
-> Explain the reflexive Pronouns
- > Form : We use I with myself

You ... yourself / yourselves
He ...himself

She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ... themselves
It ... itself

- Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns :
Used to emphasize a person or a thing .

Eg : She cut herself .

John saw himself in the mirror .

 Complete the dialogue :

- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive
pronouns or emphasis pronouns .

- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
- Give feedback :

a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself
d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself .
- Ask them to practice the complete dialogue .
2. Modal verbs

- Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she failed
her English test . What do you say to advise her ? “
“ You should study harder “

 Another word for “ should “ : Ought to
Ought to + Infinitive

Exercises:

- Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures
( Language focus 2 )

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :

a. I failed my English test .
You ought to study harder

b. You ought to get up earlier .

c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables .
d. You ought to see a dentist .

* Checking : Noughts and crosses :

His tooth / ache Hoa / late My room / untidy
The floor / dirty Bao / overweight She / thin

My English / bad Hergrades / bad The washing
machine / not
work

 Using “ Should “ to play game .

Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue ,
Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box :
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue :
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback

1. must / have to tidy ; 2. have to / must dust
3. must / have to sweep ; 4. must / have to clean

Talk the things you can do
/ can not do

Listen to the scene and
answer the questions .

-- Work individually.
Write down and give
examples

- Work in pairs to
complete the dialogue

- Practice speaking
- Wrks in pairs.

Listen and copy

- Practice in front of class.
- copy down if necessary.
- Works in pairs

Play game in two teams.

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

III/
IV/

5. have to / must empty ; 6. must / have to feed .

Consolidation:

Retell contents of this lesson.

Homework :

1. Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 )

2. Copy all the exercises above .
3. Prepare the test .

 Feedback :

-> Demonstrate in front of
class .

Listen and copy .

Teaching date : 06 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 19

: Revision

A/ The aims:

I. Teaching Points :

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate all structure grammar from unit

1 to unit 3 .They can to do all exercises in work book.

- Develop Ss’ 4 skills ( listening, Speaking, reading and writing.)

II. Preparation

:

Lesson plan, textbook, posters...

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I.Organization :

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

- Asks some Ss retell some structure grammar from unit 1to unit 3.

-T. copy down on the board.

- T.hang a poster give main structure grammar, and give them marks.III.

III.New lesson:

***

Ex1:

New lesson : Asks Ss to do exercises. Using some old 
structure grammar.( T hang a poster , give some
Structure Grammar)

Ex 1 : 1. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences:
1. He’s tall and thin. He has _______

A. black hair short B. short black hair
C. hair short black D. black short hair

2. I find he is not communicative. He’s rather _____.
A. outgoing B. humorous

C. sociable D. reserved

3. Don’t let your little brother play with the ballpoint
pen. It can _________________him.

A. move B. sweep
C. injure D. destroy

4. The lighting fixture is ______ the dinner table.
A. above B. on

C. beneath D. under

5. He’ll ____________cook meals himself.
A. can B. must

C. have to D. ought to

6. Deaf-mutes can _______speak ________hear.
A. both – and B. either – or
C. neither – nor D. not only – but also

7. Our son is old enough to look after _______.
A. himself B. herself

C. myself D. ourselves

8. Don’t come in. Please wait _______for your turn.
A. inside B. outside

C. upstairs D. downstairs

9. Alexander Graham Bell was born ________March,
3, 1847.

A. at B. in

C. on D. from

10. Would you like to go to the concert with me tonight?
- _____________________.

Play game

Listen and copy down

Work in pairs

Read the example

Read their complete
sentences

Work in pairs

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Ex2:

Ex3:

III/ 
IV/

A. Yes, please B. No, thanks

C. I’m sorry. I’d love to D. Yes. I’d love to

2 Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaing:

1. Your little brother can’t study in this school because he
is still young.

Your little brother isn’t __________________
2. Her hair is short, curly and blonde.

She has______________________________
3. Driving too fast is very dangerous.

It __________________________________
4. Do you plan to invite her to your birthday party ?
Are _______________________________

Ask Ss to do exercise.They have to work with a partner
and say what the people are going to do .

- Ask Ss to go to the board to do exercises.

3. Look at the piture and describe the bedroom with the

things below:

0. This is my Lan’s bedroom
1. There / a desk / the left / the room
2. There / a chair / the desk

3. The bed / the middle / the room

4. On the right side / the room there / a window

5. The clock / the wall, / the bed

6. The bookshelf / the wall, /the desk
7. The wardrobe / the desk

8. The cushion / the bed

Consolidation :

- Retell the main contents of this lesson .
 Homework :

1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks .
2. Write six sentences about your house , using
adverbs of place .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work individually , one
student one word

Go to the board to write
the meanings and read
them aloud .

Listen to the scene .
Work in pairs
Read out the speech
bubbles

Read the complete
sentences aloud .
Copy down .
Do exercise 4 .

- Work in pairs .
Describe the
picture.

- One by one to talk
loudly

- The others write
down on their
notebooks.
-Retell the main points.
Copy down homeworks.

§20:TEST (45’)

ENGLISH 8 (NO :1)

Name:

………

.

Class :

… ………

8

I. Choose the best answer a ,b ,c or d. (3p).

1)The sun in the East.

a.rise b.rises c.rose d.rising

2)Last year, Hoa in Hue.

a.live b.lives c.lived d.living

3) you going to see a movie ? - yes,I am.

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

a.do b.are c.did d.will

4) Who made this dress for her ? - She made it .

a .by her b. her c )herself d .hers

5) is Nam absent today?- Because he’s tired.

a.why b.what c.where d.when

6) Now, Lan to do her homework.

a.must b.have d.have to d.has.

II.Correct the following sentences.Each sentence has one mistake(2p)

1.Let’s us meet outside the cinema.=>

………

..

2.They are going buy a new car next year.=>………

3.How old are your mother?=>

………

..

4.Where do he live?=>………

III. Read the text and fill the gap True(T) or False(F). (2p ):

“ I am peter. I’m going to look for a new job and a new flat next month. I’m going to

look in the newspapers and ask all my friends for help.I’d like to move to a quieter

town because I can’t stand the noise . I’m going to stay where I am this time next year

– I know that .”

1. Peter is living in a noisy town .

2. He is not going to change his job.

3. He thinks that his friends will help him .

4. He’s going to live in another town this time next year.

1. ____ . 2. . 3 . _ . 4 . _____.

IV.Describe your close friend ( about five sentenses) : (3p )

- What is his / her name ? . How old is he / she ? what does he / she look like ? what

does he / she like ? what does he / she ofen wear ?

chữ kí giáo viên chữ kí phụ huynh
…………... ..………

Testing date : 10 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 20 :

Test

( n

O :

1 )

ENGLISH 8

–

45

’

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points:

Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the
test well .

II. Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

II. checking up:

III. Contents:

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

1. I ( read / am reading / am going to read )a book about astrology at the moment
2. We ( go / are going / will go ) to a party on Saturday .

3. Nurses ( look / are looking / are going to look ) after people in hospital .
4. Jane ( comes / is coming / will come ) form Ireland .

5. I( speak / am speaking / will speak ) speak four languages .

6. ( Do you want / are going to want / are wanting ) to go out tonight ?
II / Put the sentences into the right order to make a logical dialogue : ( 2p )
a. Yes , I am

b. Isn,t that Lan,s father , my dear ? 
c. How do you do ?

d. Excuse me ! Are you Mr Viet ?
e. I am not sure . Go and ask him .
f. I am Nam – Hoa,s father

1…... 2……. 3……. 4…….. 5……... 6…….

III / Rewrite these sentences , beginning as shown , so that the meaning stays the same ( 2P )
1. He is not tall , so he can not reach the shelf . => He is not ………..

2. The book was interesting . I read it twice . => The book was interesting ……..
3. I will phone you tomorrow morning . => I will give ……….

4. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous . => It is dangerous ……
IV / Write a paragraph about Lan , using the information in the table : (3p )

Name : Nguyen Huong Lan

Appearance : thin , tall , short black hair
Characters : friendly , humorous , helpful
Address : 25 Quang Trung Street , Nam Dinh
Family : mother , father , younge sister – Hai
Friends : Mai and Ba

Keys

I / 1,5 ps Ss get 0,25 ps for each correct one

1. am reading 2. are going 3. look 4. comes 5. speak 6. Do you want
II / 1,5 ps .

1. d 2. a 3 . c 4 . f 5. b 6. e
III / 2,0 Ss get o0,5 ps for each correct one

1. He is not tall enough to reach the shelf .

2. The book was interesting enough foe me to read twice .
3. I will give you a ring tomorrow morning .

4. Is is dangerous to put a knife into an electrical socket

IV / 3,0 . : Write enough information , grammar correctly , right form
V / 2,o ps

+ Tape script :

A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on may 11 just twelve o,clock .

The customer,s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs Van was in a

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

Unit 4:

Our past

Teaching date: 11 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 21

lesson 1

: Getting started

+ Listen and read + language focus 1

A The aims :

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell the activities people used 
to do in the past .

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalks, leson plan, picture.

B/ Steps of the leson :

I. Organization : - Greeting .
II. Checking up :

- Asks Ssretell some structures grammar of last lesson .
- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :
***

I/
1.

2.

Warm up : * Getting started

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of the
things that do not belong to the past .

* Answers :

- The TV / The radio / The mobile / The light fixture
- Modern clothing / school uniforms

Pre - reading : 
Pre- teach vocabulary

- used to + v : da tung ( trans…)
- to look after = to take care of

- (an)Equipment (n) Trang thiet bi - example
- a folktale : Tam Cam is a folk tale : chuyen dan gian.
- (a) tale: chuyen co tich ( explain..)
- Traditional ( adj ) thuoc ve truyen thong. (trans.. )
-( a) great grandfa / great grandma(n)cụ ông / cụ bà.
- Lost : (v) mất. / Lit(v) thắp , đốt ( đèn) ( .explain)
- once (adv)ngày xa. (explain )
* Checking : What and where

T / F statements prediction

- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or
false .

Statements Guess Key

1. Nga is used to live on farm

2. Nga ,s grandma did not go to school .
3. She has an easy and happy life when

F
T

Play game in two
teams.

-One by one go to the
board.

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings
and copy down
Play game

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

II/

***

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
***

III/

IV/
V/

she was young .

4. There was not any modern equipment
at her time .

5. “ The lost shoe “ is a short story

F
T
F
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the
board .

While - reading :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books to read
the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to check their
predictions

- Ask them to correct the false statements .
1. Grandma used to love on farm

3. She had a hard life .
5. It is an old folk tale .
* Comprehension :

- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering questions
- Give feedback

a. She used to live on a farm .

b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to
look after her younger brothers and sisters .

c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash
the clothes .

d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great
father used to tell stories .

e.She asked her grandma to tell her the tale“The lost shoe“
- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the questions .
* Fact or opinion

- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide which

is a fact and which is a pinion .

Statements Fact Opinion

a. I used to live on a farm .
b. There was not any electricity .
c. Mom had to do everything without
the help of modern equipment .
d. My father used to tell us stories
e. The best one was the lost shoe .
f. Traditional stories are great .

X
X
X
X X

X
- Give feedback

Post - reading : * Survey

Did you use to ...? Name
Get up late. / Ride bicycle too fast .

Go to school. / Eat too much candy .
Forget to do your homework .

- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to check “
Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ...? “
- Write it down .

Consolidation: Retell the main points .

Homework :

1. Write the result of their survey .
2. Learn by heart new words .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

and predict.
-Read their
predictions

Listen to the tape and
look at their books to
check their

predictions

- Correct the false
ones

- work in pairs

Practice asking and
answering the
questions .

Read the statements
and decide which is a
fact and which is a
opinion

- Practice in groups
Demonstrate in front
of class .

Listen and copy .

- Retell the main
points.

- Copy down home
works.

Unit 4: Our past

_______________________________________________

Teaching date: 14 / 10 / 2008 .

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

+ Language focus 2,4

A / The aims :

I.Teaching points

: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about
the things they used to do .

II. Teaching aids :

Textbooks , word cards for drilling, lesson plan, poster.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization:

- Greeting and ask some questions.

II. Checking up:

- Ask Ss to stand up and retell new words of last lesson.( say about the
meaning, form.)

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
II/

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
***

1.
2.

Warm up : Jumbled words

- rieletcicty = Electricity
- menttaenterin = Entertainment
- rkmaet = Market

- permasuekt = Supermarket
 Pre - speaking :

 Recall the conversation between Nga and her
grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,s grandma 
always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm .
- Ask : “ Another word for always lived “ .

Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer.
“ Where did Nga ,s grandma use to live ? “

She used to live on a farm .
 Form : S + Used to + inf

S + did not use to + inf
Did + S + use to + inf ?

 Expressing a past habit , or an action usually
happened in the past .

 Practice
Word cue drill

a. Live / Hue / Hanoi

b. Have / long hairs / short hairs

c. Get up / late / early

d. Walk to school / bicycle

e. Study / evening / early morning

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the cues above .

While - speaking :

- Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs .
- Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED TO “
to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas
below :

1. Where did they live in the past ? And now ?
2. How did they travel ?

3. What is about the electricity ?
4. What is about their life / work ?
5. Did children use to go to school ?
6. What is about their entertainment ?

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .

* Suggested answers :

1. People used to live in small houses . Now they live in

big houses and buildings.

2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or

Play games

- One by one to go to the
board to write.

Practice reading the
conversation and answer
the questions

Listen and copy
- Practise in pairs

Practice speaking with
cues

Work in pairs

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

3.
4.
5.
6.
III/

IV/
V./

motorbikes .

3. Now , there is electricity everywhere .

4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they
have a lot of time for entertainment .

5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they all go
to school .

6. Children used to play traditional games such as hide
and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they have a lot
of modern games – video games .

Post - speaking : * Write it up

- Ask Them to write a complete writing about the
difference of the life in the past and now.

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Correct common mistakes .

Consolidation:

Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework :

1. Write about the things you used to do last year .

Beginning : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , I get

up very early and do morning exercises . ... ... “
2. Do exercise in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

- One by one

- copy down if necessary

Work individually .
- Retell the main points

Listen and copy .

Unit 4

Our past

Teaching date: 17 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 23

lesson 3:

Listen

A / The aims:

I . Teaching points :.By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the main idea of 
a story by listening . Develop’s listening skill.

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board ,lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization:

II. Checking up : Asks sme Ss to stand up and say about the new word of last lesson.
T corrects and give them marks

III. New lesson:
***

I/
1.

***

I / Warm up : Pelmanism

run ran fly flew ride rode
eat ate sit sat come came
- Continue until all the cards are finished .

Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening task
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- Foolish (a) = ngÊ ngÈn , ngèc nghiÕch
- greedy ( a) = tham lam

- Gold (n) ( realia )

- to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture )

- amazement (n) = ngạc nhiên , vui nhén

* Checking : What and where

Play game
Listen and copy
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually
Copy down

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

II/
1.

III/

IV/
V/

2. Prediction :

- Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story .
- Have them look at four titles and guess which is the
most suitable to the story .

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - listening :

1. Checking the prediction

- Turn on the tape twice and ask them to check their
predictions .

- Call on some Ss to read their results and give feed back
: “ Don,t be foolish and greedy “

- Turn on the tape once more to check their results
again .

2. Find out the verbs in the story :

- Ask Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple past
tense )

- Have Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs as
possible . The student who writes more verbs get good
marks .

- Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud .

- Give feedback: went / discovered / laid / shouted /

finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / 
decided .

- Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs.
Post - listening : Mapped dialogue

Lan : ...lunch ?

Nga : No . I ate noodles .

Lan : How ... school ?
Nga : I rode a bicycle to school .

Lan : Which subject did you have yesterday ?
Nga : ... math .

Lan : ...?
Nga : I was at home .

- Ask them to work in pairs to practice the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback .

Consolidations:

- Retell the mains points.( some Ss to retell ) .
V / Homework :

1. Copy the completed dialogue in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises ... in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in groups to
predict .

Read their predictions
aloud .

Listen to the tape and
check their predictions
Read their results and
write down .

Listen and find out the
verbs in the tape
Read them aloud .

Give the infinitives of
these verbs .

Practice in pairs

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Unit 4: Our past

Teaching date: 18 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 24 Lesson 4 : Read + language focus 3

A/

The aims

:

I. Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand and retell the story
- The lost shoe .

II. Teaching aids : Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ,lesson plan and picture...

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization: Greeting

II. Checking up: -Retell the Story “ Don’t be foolish and greedy” .
- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:
***

I/
1.

2.

II/
1.

2.

* Warm up : * Brainstorming

Name some folks tales that you have read .
 Possible answers :

- Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo )
- Tấm cám . / Hoàng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đơi hài 7 dặm ( Seven mile shoes )

- Bạch tuyết và b¶y chó lïn ( Snow white and 7 dwarfs )

I / Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 
reading and some new words to Ss .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried

- fairy (n) = truỵện cổ tích
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )

- to fall in love with = yªu

- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc
* Checking : R& R
2. T / F statements predictions

- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict

Statements Guess Key

1. Little Pea,s father is poor farmer

2. Her father got married again after his
wife died .

3. Her new mother was beautiful and nice
to her .

4. She worked hard all day .

5. She did not have new clothes to take part
in the festival .

T
T
F
T
F

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board

II / While - reading : 
1. Checking the predictions :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their
text books to check their predictions and correct the
false ones .

Play games in two
teams

Copy some names of the
stories in English .

Listen and copy

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .

- Works in pairs

Play games

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

3.

III/

IV/
V/

- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her .
- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes.
- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes if
any.

2. Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering .
- Listen and give feedback

a. She was a poor farmer ,s daughter . 
b. She made her do the chores all day .

c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes .
d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe fitted
her .

e. Ss answer themselves .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.

3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words from
the story .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with suitable
words from the story .

- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Give feedback

a. farmer b. died

c. used d. marry / choose
e. clothes f. lost

III / Post - reading : *Retell the story

- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in details
( They can look at the statements in the gap filling
exercise and add more )

- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of class .

- Correct mistakes if any .

Consolidations:

- Retell the mains points.
 Homework :

1. Rewrite the story .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Read their predictions

Listen and check their
predictions .

Read their results and
correct the false ones .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions

Work in pairs to

complete the sentences
Read their complete
sentences .

Listen and copy .
Work in pairs to retell
the story in details .
Demonstrate in front of
class .

Listen and copy .

Teaching date: 20/ 10 / 2008 .

Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra

tiếng anh 8

---ỏP áN

I.(3p)

1. b

2. c

3. b

4. c

5. a

6. d.

II. (2p)

1. Let’s meet outside the cinema.

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

3. How old is your mother? / How old are you?

4. Where does he live ?/ Where do you live ?

III.(2p)

1. T

2. F

3. T

4. T

IV.(3P)

His name’s Nam. He’s my best friend. He’s 14 years old. He’s handsome.

He’s tall , thin and has short black hair. He likes playing soccer, badminton

and listening to music. He often wears a white T-shirt black trouser.

** Giáo viờn a ỏp ỏn.

Sửa lỗi học sinh hay mắc phải.

Nhận xét bài kiểm tra.

Gọi điểm.

Unit 4 : Our past

Teaching date: 24 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 26

lesson 5

: Write

A/ The aims :

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Simple Past Tense to write
a folk tale .

II. Teaching aids : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization: - Greeting

II. Checking up:- Retell the story “the foolish famer and greedy wife”
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:
***

1.
2.
3.
4.
I/
1.

Warm up : * Chatting

- Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories
1. Do you want to read imaginary stories ?
2. Name some of them

3. Which story do you like best ?

4. Have you ever read the story “ how the tigers got his
stripes “ ?

Pre - writing : Introduce the aims of the writing and

some new words .

1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n
- a stripe (n) ( realia )
- a straw ( n) ( realia )

- a servant (n) : ngời phục vụ , đầy tớ
- to graze ( picture )

- to escape : trèn tho¸t

- to light – lit – lighted ( mime )

Play game

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

*

***

II/

III/

IV/
V/

* Checking : Matching

A B

1. wisdom a. trốn thoát
2. a stripe b. đờng sọc
3. a straw c. ăn cỏ , gặm cỏ
4. a servant d. trí khơn

5. graze e. rơm rạ
6. escape f . đầy tí

- Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on the left
with those on the right by drawing a line connecting the
story .

* Reading :

- Ask Ss to read and complete the story .

- Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the box .
- Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to fill in
the blanks .

- Call on them to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback

1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left
5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped
+ Comprehension questions :

1. where was the man ?

2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?

3. What did the tiger want to know ?

4. What did he do before going home ? Why ?
5. What did he do when he returned ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions above .

While - writing :

- Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to be a
man in order to write the story )

+ Notice : Change

The man -> I / His -> My

- Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their
partners and correct mistakes .

- Take some writings to correct in front of the class.
- Give suggested answers :

Post - writing : * Telling the story

- Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the role of
the tiger . Team B plays the role of the buffalo

- Ask them to work in team , telling the story
Notice :

- Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I
- Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I
Consolidation:

- Retell the main points.
 Homework :

1. Write the story again , imagine you are :
* The tiger

* The buffalo

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work individually .

Read the verbs in the
box and say the
meanings of them .
Read the complete
story .

Work in pairs to practice

asking and answering
the questions .

Write the story
individually .

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Play the roles of tiger
and buffalo , telling the
story .

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Teaching date: 25 / 10 / 2008 .

Period 27

revision

A / The aims :

I. Teching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use prepositions of time and 
Used to ( to talk about the action which always happens in the past ) and further practice in the
Past Simple Tense .

- Develop Ss’ four skills ( listening, speaking, reading, and writing.)

II. Teaching aids : Text books , boards , chalk,posters, pictures, lesson pan.

0B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.
II. Checking up :

III. New lesson :

***

I/
1.

II/

Warm up :

* Matching

A B Key

1. In a. January 1.a / d

2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e

3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f

4. Between d. November 1997 4. f
5. After / Before e. July 2nd 5. b

f. 7 a m and 9 am
- Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase .

- Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and ask

Ss to do Exercises

Practice 
Ex 3 / page 44

- Ask Ss to work individually , then compare with their
partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Give feedback

a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before

Ex 4 : Complete the dialogue :

- Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using
USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have – be
“ to complete the dialogue between Nga and Hoa .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .

0. used to stay 
1. used to have 
2. used to be 
3. used to live

Further practice :

Deliberate mistakes

- Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen
carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they
hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then correct
it .

Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday
Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday .

a. My father used to play football when he has spare
time .

b. She used live in Ha noi .

c. My parents will arrive in 3 o,lock .

Play game

Read the correct phrases
aloud

Work individually
.Compare with their
partners .

Read the complete
sentences aloud .
Copy down .
Work in pairs

Practice the dialogue .

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

III/
IV/

d. He was born in June the third .

 Exercice: Complete the following sentences :
0. He / used to / go / work / bicycle.

=>He used to go to work by bicycle.

1. When / I ./ little girl / I / not / use to / cry.
=> When I was alitle girl I did not use to cry.

2. My parents / used to / take / me / my sister / beautiful
park / city/ Sundays. => My parents used to take me and

my sister to a beautiful park in the city on Sundays .

3. I / used to / chase(duoi bat)/ butterflies / my / sister .
=> I used to chase butterflies with my sister.

4. Now / we / not / small children / any longer.
 => Now we are not small children any longer.
5. We / teachers / secondary school / village.

=> We are teachers of a secondary school in a village.
6. We / take / parents / beautiful park / weekends. =>We

take our parents to a beautiful park at the weekends.

7. We / watch / stars / sky / night .
=>We watch stars in the sky at night.
8. Now / They / old / can’t work.
=> Now they are old and can t work.’

9. We / think / must / try / please / parents / make /
happy. => We think we must try to please our parents

and make them happy.

10. We / work / support / them / make / them /

comfortable. => We work to support them and to make

them comfortable.

* Consolidation :

- Retell the main points of this lesson .
 Homework :

1. Do exercises (1,2) in textbook .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and copy .
-

- Do exercises.
works in pairs.

- Then one by one
to go to the board
to do exercises.
- copy down on

their notebook.

- Retell the main points.

- Copy down
homeworks

unit 5 : Study habits

Teaching date: 27 / 10 / 2008

Period 28

Lesson 1:

Getting started

Listen and read

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue 
between Jim and his Mom about his study .

II. Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks,CD, lesson plan ..

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance
II. Checking up:

- Asks Ss to retell the mains structure grammar.
- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :
*** Warm up : ** Net work

- Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the
blackboard

Work in groups to play
games

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

***

II/

***

III/

* Possible answers :

Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature /
history .

- Lead in the new lesson by Chatting
Pre - reading :

- What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ?
- What subject do you like best ? / Why ?
- How often do you have maths ? / Literature..?
1. Pre- teach vocabulary :

- a report card ( realia ): phieu bao diem

- pronunciation ( mime ) (n) cach phat am, ngu am.
-(to)improve ( situation ):cai thien ,trau doi

-(to)be proud of = tu hao .
- (to) promise: hua.

- to try one,s best = co gang het suc

* Checking : Rub out and remember

* / F statements predictions : - Ask Ss to read the 
statements and predict they are true or false .

Statements Guess Key

1. Tim was out when his mother

called him . F

2. Tim,s mother met his teacher at

school . F

3. Tim,s report is poor . F
4. Tim needs to improve his Spanish

grammar T

5. Tim promised to try his best in

learning Spanish . T

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - reading :

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books , then
read the dialogue to check their predictions .

- Call on some Ss to read their results .
- Give feedback :

- Ask Ss to correct false statements .
1. Tim was in the living room / at home

2. his report is excellent

3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
class .

- Listen and correct their pronunciation if any .
* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .

- Give feedback .
a. She is Tim,s teacher .

b. She gave Tim,s mother his report card . 
c. He worked really hard .

d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation .

e. She gave him a dictionary

- Ask them to practice in open pairs .
Post - reading : Survey

- Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each other
the question “ What subject do you need to improve ? “

Read the answers aloud.
Chat the questions .
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down

Play game

Work individually

Read their predictions
aloud .

Listen and read the
dialogue to check their
predictions .

Correct false ones .
Read them aloud .
Practice the dialogue in
pairs .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions .

Open pairs

- Asks each other: What

subjects do you need to
improve ?

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

IV/

and they have to write the names and the subjects that
their friends answer :

Name What subject

Lan
………….

History
………..

- Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects work in
group and discuss how to improve .

Homework : 1. Write the way how to improve the 
subject that they are not good at .

2. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and copy .

-Copy down homeworks

unit 5

Study habits

Teaching date: 29 / 10 / 2008.

Period 29

lesson 2:

Speak

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their study habits .
- Develop Ss’ speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks Ss retell sme mains subjects at school.
- Some pairs ask and answer about their subjects

S1: How often do we have music ?
S2: We have music 2times aweek.
=> T corrects and give them marks.
III. New lesson :

***

I/

Warm up :

*Brainstorming

- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :

- Speak English to friends in class
- Watch English TV

- Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories

- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program

Work in groups to play
games .

Read all the ways of
improving English .

Copy in their
notebooks .

How to improve

your English ?

How to improve

your English ?

Do Exercises

Read EL stories

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

II/

***

III/

IV/
V/

Pre - speaking :

Introduce the topic of the speaking .

- Call on some Ss to read the possible answers above
and copy down .

- Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes.
 While – speaking :

- Asks Ss work in groups of three or four .in the tables.
Ask each other about your studies.Use the questions and
words in the boxes to help them.

1. When do you do your homework?

( after school / after dinner / late at night / … )
2. Who helps you with your homework?

( your parents / your brother / your sisters / a friend …)

…

- Asks Ss do exercises in the text books in page 48 .
- T gets feedback.

Call some pairs to talk loudly.
- Others listening.

* Model :

Lan said she did her homework after dinner

He / she said ………

- Call on some pairs to read the model
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any .

Post - speaking :

- Ask Ss to write with information above .

Eg : Lan ,s elder brother helps him with his homework . 
- Call on some Ss to read their writings .

Consolidation:

-Retell the mains points of this lesson .( Some Ss to
retell)

Homework :

1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they have
found out .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and read the
model , then copy
Work in pairs

Practice in front of class.
Work individually .
Read their writings

- Ss works in pairs .
- copy down some keys
if necessary.

- Write with these
informations
- Some pairs to

practise.

- Retell the main points .
Copy down

homeworks..

unit 5 :Study habits

Teaching date: 01 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 30

lesson 3 : Listen

+ LanGuage focus 1

–

2

.

A /

The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen for specific 
information to fill in a report card . And They will be able to use adverb of manner, do
exercises language focus 1+ 2 in page 52 in Ss’s books.

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks Ss retell the new words of last lesson.
- T . corrects and give them marks.

III . New lesson :
***

I/

1.

***
2.

II/
1.

2.

III/

Warm up : * Retelling

- Ask Ss to retell “ How to improve your English “
 Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and 
some new words :

Pre – teach vocabulary :

- behavior (n) = cach ung xu, hanh vi. (trans..)
- participant (n) = nguoi tham gia, su tham gia.
- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (adj)

thoa mai, hai long, toai nguyen > < ko thoa mai,…
- cooperation (n) = su hop tac

- attendance (n) = su du, so nguoi co mat,

- (to)appreciate = danh gia cao ,cam kich, hieu ro gia tri.

* Checking : What and where

Prediction :

- Ask Ss to look at Nga,s report and predict the missing 
information and then compare with their partners .
a. day present (1) / b. Day absent (2)

c. Behavior – participant (3)
d. Listening (4) / e. Speaking (5)
f. Reading (6) / g. Writing (7)

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

While - listening :
1. Listen :

- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction .
- Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback .
1. 87 days present

2. 5 days absent

3. participation : Spanish pronunciation
4. Listening : Comprehension

5. Speaking : A

6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B

Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,s report 
card .

1. Who are Nga,s parents ?

2. What is Nga,s teacher,s name ?

3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?

5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs to
answer the questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .

Post - listening : 
 ** Survey:

Questions You ur partner

1. When do you do your homework ?
2. Who helps you with your homework?
3. How much time do you spend on
Maths / English / History / Literature ?
4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?

5. What do you do to improve your

Retell individually .
Listen and copy .
Listen and repeat in
chorus and individually .
Copy down .

Play game

Predict and compare
with their partners .

Report their predictions .
Listen to the tape and
check their predictions
Read their results .

Work in pairs tom
practice asking and
answering the
questions .

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

***

IV/
V/

English?

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners questions
and taking notes of the answers .

- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what they
have known about their partners, study .

- Correct mistakes if any .
Language focus !+ 2 (52)

1. Complete the dialoguge: - T hangs a poster
– Asks Ss to do exercises in pairs .

2. Look at the picture and say what he should do
Eg: Mr. Hao should repair the roof.

…

Consolidation:

- Retell the mains points of this lesson .
 Homework :

1. Write something about your partners, study habits 
Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and
always get good grades . she usually does her homework
after school

answering the questions
and report their survey .

- Do exercises LF

1 , Works in
pairs.

- Do EX 2 (52) . Work
in groups of tables

Listen and copy down
homeworks.

unit 5 : Study habits

Teaching date: 03 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 31: Lesson 4 :

Read + Language focus 3, 4

A / The aims:

I . Teachingpints : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text and get 
specific information ..

- They can do all exercises language focus 3,4 in the textbooks (52).
II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks, lesson plans,posters….

B / Steps of the lessson :

I. Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialoguge .
- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:
***

I /
1.

2.

Warm up : * Chatting 
1. Do you like English ?

2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ?
3. What do you do when you read a new words ?
4. How do you learn / remember new words ?
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .

- Correct and lead in the new lesson .

Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the reading 
passage and some new words .

Pre- teach vocabulary :

-(a) Mother tongue ( example ): tiếng mẹ đẻ
-(to )underline ( example ): gạch dới, gạch chân.
- (to) highlight ( example ):làm nổi bật.

-( to) come across ( synonym ) = Run in to : gặp tình cờ.

- (to) stick ( mime ): dán , dÝnh , cµi…

* Checking : * Slap the board 
Brainstorming

Practice asking and
answering the question

Listen and copy .
Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down .

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

***

II/
1.

2.

III./

IV /
V/

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways how
a language learner can learn new words .

* Possible answers :
- Learn by heart

- Translate it into mother tongue

- Write each word on one piece of paper and put it into
the pocket to learn whenever

- Learn through example sentences

- Write it on small piece of paper and stick everywhere
in the house …….

While - reading :

1. True / False statements

- Ask Ss to read the statements , then read the text and
decide which is true and which is false .

( Page 50 )

- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
a. F b. T c . F d . T

* Reading :

- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud .
2. Comprehension questions

- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some Pairs to practice asking and answering

the questions

- Give feedback

a. No . They learn words in different ways .

b. Because they help them to remember the use of new
words .

c. They write examples , put the words and their
meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them .
d. They may think they can not do so . Instead , they
learn only important words .

e. Revision is necessary in learning words .

f. Learners should try different ways of learning words t
find out what is the best .

Post - reading : * Survey

- Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another and
tick the ways they have used to learn new words

Ways of learning words Lan Hoa ...

1. Make a list of words , their meanings
and learn them by heart .

2. Write sample sentences with new words

3. Stick new words somewhere in the
house .

4. Underline or highlight the words .
5. Read stories in English .

6. Learn words through songs .

- Call on Ss to report about their groups .

Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words ….

Consolidation:

- Retell the main points ß thÝ leson .

Homework :

1. Write the ways of learning words that you think are
the best for you .

2. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in pairs

Report and copy the
answers .

Work individually

Read the text aloud .

Practice asking and
answering the questions
in pairs .

Work in groups .

Copy down homeworks

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

unit 5 : Study habits

Teaching date: 05 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 32

Lesson 5

:

Write

A/ The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the format of a friendly
letter and practice writing a letter to a friend .

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards,lesson plan, posters ….

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance

II. Checking up: -Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words and meaning of these 
words. Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:
***

I/
1.

***
2.

3.
4.

II/

Warm up : Chatting

1. Have you ever written to someone ?
2. To whom do you usually write ?
3. What do you often write about ?
- Lead in new lesson .

Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and 
some new words to Ss .

Pre – teach vocabulary :

- Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation )Tet am lich.
- Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thu , thich thu, vui thich
- (to) celebrate = ki niem , to chuc ki niem.
-> celebration (n) le ki niem.

- Mid-Autumn Festival(n) Tet trung thu.
- Moon festival( n) : le hoi mung trang

* Checking : Rub out and remember 
 Ordering:

- Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order.
a. Opening d. Body of the letter

b. Closing e. Signature

c. The date f . Writer,s address .
- Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e
- Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order .
 Labeling

- Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter .
Comprehension questions

- Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions
a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ?

b. What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter ?
d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ?
e. What subject is Hoa good at ?

f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year
Festival ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in
front of class .

While - writing :

- Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter
to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given
information .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front

Play games

Listen and copy down

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Copy down .

Play games .

Do the exercise
individually .

Read and check .

Label each section with
the correct letter .

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

III/
IV/
V/

of class .

* Suggested letter :

15 Quang Trung street 
Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 
Dear Donna

Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had an 
interesting Mother,s Day .

We have received our second semester report last 
month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics and 
Math but my English and History results were poor . My
teacher advises me to improve English and History . I 
think I have to study harder next school year .

In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid 
Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in 
Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay 
with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay 
ther with them until the festival comes . I will send you a
postcard from there .

Write soon and tell me all your news . 
Best

Lan ,

Post - writing : ***Correction

- Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the
mistakes .

Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson .
Homeworks :

1. Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her about
your second semester report and about Summer
holiday .

2. Learn by heart vocabulary and mains structure
grammar.

3. Redo all exercises of language focus .
4. Prepare for next lesson.

Imagine and write the a
letter individually .
- Share with their
partners

Read their letters aloud .
Copy down .

- Retell the mains points
of this lesson.

- Copy dowm
homeworks

unit 5

Study habits

Teaching date: 8 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 33:

Revision

A /The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use adverbs of manner and 
modal Should as an advice , reported speech with commands , requests and advice .

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , poster , ten cards, lesson plan .

B / Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance

II. Checking up: - T asks some questions and call some Ss to answer the qs:
1. Do you often write to someone? ( yes, I do)

2. Who do you often wrtie to?( I often wrtie to my friends)

3. What do you often include in your letter ?( Inlcude : heading, open, body of the letter,
closing )

4. How do you open a letter?( Dear, …)

5. How do you close it ? ( Your friend / Regards / Love …).
=> T gets feedback and give them marks .

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

I /
1.

2.

***

3.

rode eat ate sit sat

- Explain the meanings and uses of them

+ Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different meanings
 Presentation

Adverbs of manner .

- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game
Pelmanism to complete the following sentences “
* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun
or : S + be + Adjective

S + V + adverb

* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject
Adv modifies the verb of the sentence .

Exercise 1 / 52 : Complete the dialogues

- Ask Ss to work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .

1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly

- Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs .
 Modal : Should

- Ask Ss to look at Mr Hao,s house and answer some 
questions

a. Is his house new ?
b. Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ?

d. Is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr Hao repair the roof ?
Suggested answers :

a. No , it isn,t b. Yes , it is c. It is broken 
d. Yes. There is lots of grass in his garden.
e. Yes, he should .

-> Explain the modal “ Should “
+ Form : S + Should + infinitive
+ Use : give advice

+ Meaning : nen ( lam gi )

Exercise 2 / 52

Give Ss the question “ What should he do with his house
?

 mend ? / paint ? / replant ? / cut ? / repair ?
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the verbs to advise Mr
Hao what to do .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the question “ What should he do with his house ? “
- Give feedback .

a. Mr Hao should repair the roof .
b…………...paint the house
c. ………...cut the grass .
d. ………...replant the tree
e. ………….mend the door

Commands , requests in reported speech 
- Explain the form of the reported speech :
* Form :

To ask / tell + someone + to do something 
+ Example :

a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “

=> Mr Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary
b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “

=> Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary

Exercise 3 / 53 : Explain the situation to Ss

- Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise .

- Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud , then go
to the board to write them on .

- Give feedback

Play games

Listen and copy down

Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of
class .

Practice asking and
answering the

questions .

Listen and give
examples .

Practice in pairs

Practice in pairs in front
of class .

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

Unit 6

The young pioneers club

Teaching date: 10 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 34

lesson 1

: Getting started + Listen and read

+ Language focus 1.

A / The aims:

I . Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue 
about the young pioneers .Ss Will be able to use the simple present tense with future meaning.
II. Teaching aids : Textbook , 5 cards for drill , Cassette, posters, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson

I. Organization: Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:Asks 2 Ss to retell the new words and their meaning .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lwesson :
***

I/
1.

**
2.

***

3.

* Warm up : * Chatting

Ask Ss some questions about their activities and their summer
holidays .

1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ?
2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth
Organization ?

3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ?
4. Do you take part in them ?

5. What activity do you like most ?

Presentation : Introduce the topic of the lesson and some new

words to Ss .

. Pre – teach vocabulary :

-( to ) enroll ( translation ) :dang ki vao., ghi danh.
- Answer application form ( visual )

- Out door activities : Games that you play in the open air rather
than in a building or a house such as : football , tennis ….

- Hobby (n) (Revision)
- Acting (n) (revision)

* Checking :* Rub out and remember 
Listen and read the dialogue :

- Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight . She wants to
enroll in the activities for the summer . “

- Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time.
- Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,s particulars . 
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.
- Give feedback

* Name : Pham Thi Nga

* Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street
* Phone number : Not available
* Date of birth : April 22 , 1989
* Sex : Female

* Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting
- Ask Ss some questions :

+ What is her name ?
+ What does she live ?
+ When was she born ?
+ What are her hobbies ?

- Call on some Ss to answer the questions .
. Concept checking

Chatting
( whole class )

Listen and repeat
in chorus and
individually , then
copy .

Play game

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

***

II/

III/
IV/

- What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing

- What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting

- What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ -> gerund
- What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing

- When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs : like , love ,
enjoy , hate , mind .

* Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund
* Drill : word cue drill

- Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them :
a. play soccer / volley ball

b. watch TV / listen to music
c. read books / do homework

d. Chat with friends / do the housework
e. Cook meal / decorate the house .
=> What are your hobbies ?

I like / love playing soccer and volleyball .
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering
- Correct mistakes if any .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
Production * Survey

- Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups of three to ask
their friends and tick on the chart .

Do you like name / Nam Mai

love like don,t hate

like love like don

,t hate like

- play soccer
- washing up
- cooking meals
- performing music
- gathering broken glasses
- watching TV

- play badminton

- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies .

Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
 Homework :

1. Write about their friend,s hobbies .

- Learn vocabulary, main structure Grammar by heart
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Answer the
questions
( whole class )

Listen and copy
the form . Then
practice

Practice reading
the dialogue in
pairs .

Work in groups

-Ss Retell the main
points.

Listen and copy
- Copy down
homeworks.

Unit 6

The young pioneers club

Teaching date:12 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 35:

Lesson 2

: Speak

A/The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to 
favors . offer and respond to assistance .

Develop Ss’ speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids: Cut out shark , cut out girl / boy , textbook , lesson plan,posters.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendances
II. Checking up: - Retell the model sentences.

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

III. New lesson:
***

I/

II/
1.
2.

III/

Warm up : * Shark, s attack

- Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card
- Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl / boy on
the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea .

- Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor

Presentation

- Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR
+ What do you say to ask for a favor ?
Can you help me ?

Could you do me a favor ?
Can / Could you ………..?
+ When do you ask for favor ?
Need some help

+ How do you say to respond to favor ?
Certainly / Of course / sure

No problem

+ What does the receptionist say ?
May I help you ?

+ What is for ?

For offering assistance

+ another way to offer assistance ?

Do you need any help ? / Let me help you .
+ How do you say to respond to assistance ?
Yes . No , thank you .

- Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases

Asking for favor Responding for favor

* Can / Could you help
me please ?

* Could you do me a
favor ?

* I need a favor
* Can / could you ..?

* Certainly / of course / sure
* No problem

* What can I do for you ?
* How can I help you ?
* I am sorry . I am really busy

Offering assistance Responding to assistance

* May I help you ?
* Do you need any help
?

* Let me help you .

* Yes / No . Thank you

* Yes . That is very kind of you .

* No . thank you . I am fine .
I can manage .

- Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then individually all the
phrases in the chart .

Practice :

* Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct pronunciation if any .

* Use the appropriate phrases to make similar

dialogues about some of the following situations with a
partner.

- Have Ss work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

Production : Situation : A receptionist wants to help a 
tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank

Receptionist : ………?
Tourist : yes . Can you ………..?

Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get out of 
the hotel . Turn left at the first corner .

………... your right .
Tourist :………

Play game in two teams

Listen and practice
asking and answering
the questions

-Work in pairs.
Listen and copy
-Work individually

- Practice in pairs

- Copy down on their
notebooks

-Work individually

Repeat chorally ,
individually

-Practice the dialogue.
Work in pairs

- Make similar
dialogues.
Work in pairs

Closed pairs

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

IV/
V/

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make the dialogue and move
around the class and help Ss .

- Call on some Ss to practice the dialogue in front of the
class .

Consolidations:

-Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework :

1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance and
favor and how to respond them .

2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost
money .

- Prepare for next lesson.

and to make the
dialogues.

Practice the dialogues in
front of class

Listen and copy .
- Copy down
homeworks

Unit 6

The young pioneers club

Teaching date: 15 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 36

lesson 3

: Listen + language focus 2.

A/ The aims:

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a song for

details

II.Teaching aids : Text book , cassette , chalk , posters , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I . Organization:

-Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :

Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to read aloud their letter.

-Teacher corrects and give them marks .

III. New lesson:

***
I/
1.

2.

II/

Warm up : Listen to a song 
- Let Ss listen to the song for fun

Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and 
some new words to Ss .

*Pre – teach vocabulary

- to unite = doan ket , hop nhat , ket hop ( trans)
- peace (n) > < war (n)

- (to) shout out (st) : noi to (action)
- hold hand (v) : nam tay. (action)

- … From place to place …: tu noi nay den noi khac…
+ Land: (revision)

+ World: (revision)
+ South: (revision)
+ North: (revision)

* Guess the missing words

- Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song
- Get them to share with their partners and report their
predictions .Then write them on the board .

While - listening :

- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their

Listen to a song

Listen and copy down
Work in groups to guess
the missing words in the
song .

Report their predictions.

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

III/

***

a)

b)

IV/
V/

predictions .

- Call on some Ss to read their results
- Give feedback

Children of our land unite

Let

,

s sing for peace ,

Let

,

s sing for right .

Let

,

s sing for the love between north and south ,

Oh, children of our land , unite .

Children of the world hold hands .

Let

,

s show our love from place to place .

Let

,

s shout out loud ,

Let

,

s make a stand ,

Oh , children of the world , hold hands .

-Turn on the tape once more to check the results again .
 Post - listening :

- Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the song
+ Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally .

- Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song.
* Language focus 2:

+ Gerunds: (danh dong tu) We use the _ing form as a 
noun called a gerund.

+ The gerund as an uncountable noun in general
statements.

eg: Dancing is fun.

+ The gerund as an uncountablenoun with SOME,
ANY , NO , A LOT OF, ALITTLE , ENOUGH.
eg: I did some shopping this morning . …

*Look at the table . Talk about our friends’ hobbies:
A: Ba loves playing soccer , but he doesn’t like
washing up.

B: Lan doesn’t like playing soccer and she doesn’t like
washing up ,either.

…..

* Copy the table in to your exercise book.Then complete
it with information about you . Next ask and answer

questions with your partner.:

A - Do you like playing soccer ?

B - No. I hate it . What about you ?.

C- Yes. I love playing soccer.

D -

…

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
Homework :

1. Copy down the completed song .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and check the
results again .

Learn how to sing

Listen and copy . Work
in groups of four.

- Some Ss of each group
to sing a song.

- Copy down new
Grammar

Structure .

-Work individually.
Give example.

- Look at the table
and talk about
their friends’
hobbies.
- Work in pairs .

- Copy the table in to the
notebook.

-Then ask and answer
the questions with your
partner .

Some Ss retell the main
points of this lesson.
-Copy down

homeworks.

Unit 6 : The young pioneers club

Teaching date : 17 / 11 / 2008.

Period 37

-

lesson 4

: Read + language focus 3

A/ The aims :

I-Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about a youth 
organization – the Boy Scouts of America ( BSA )

II.Teaching aids : Text book , Poster of T /F statements , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

II. Checking up: - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to retell the new words .
- The whole class sing a song of last lesson.

III. New lesson: 
***

I/
1.

2.

II/
1.

2.

3.

III/

*Warm up : *Jumbled words

- Write six words whose letters are in disorder
1. Racchtaer 4. Pexainl

2. Iojn 5 . Nessmsibuan
3. Mai 6 . Thauolgh

- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams and call on 6 Ss from h team
write the right words on the board .

1. Character 2. Join 3. Aim
4. Explain 5. Businessman 6. Although

*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the reading 
passage and some new words to Ss .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- to encourage : give the verb which means to give Sb
support

- Citizenship (n) = quyen cong dan
- coeducational (a) ( translation )
- Voluntary (a) = tu y , tu nguyen .

- to establish = to start / to create an organization
* Checking : Slap the board

*T /F Statements prediction

- Stick the poster with the statements on the blackboard
and guess which is true , which is false .

a. The Boy Scout of America is a youth organization
b. Scouting began in America

c. William Boyce is a businessman in LOndon .
d. Boys and girls can join BSA

e. The Scouting Association is the biggest voluntary
youth organization in the world .

- Call on Ss to report their predictions and write them on
the board

*While - reading : 
* Reading :

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books at the
same time to read the passage to check their predictions
- Call on some Ss to read their results aloud and give
feedback : a. T b. F c. F d. F e. T

- Have them correct false statements .
b. Scout began in England

c. William Boysce is an American business man .
d. BSA is mainly for boys .

- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .
- Correct mistakes if any .

*Fill in the missing dates

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise 1 / 57
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback :a.1907 b. 1909 c. 1910 d. 1994
*Answer :

- Have Ss work in pairs to practice asking answering the
questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
- Give feedback

a. Scouting began in England in 1907

b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr William Boyce led the
Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910 .

c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides Association and Camp Fire
Boys and girls .

d. They are building characters , good citizenship and personal
fitness .

Work in 2teams
+ Play a game

Listen and copy .
- Work individually.
- Copy down new
lesson..

Repeat chorally ,
individually .
Play game

Work in groups to
predict .

Report their predictions
Listen to the tape and
read the passage to
check their predictions
Read their results .
Correct the false
statements

Read the passage aloud .
Work in pairs to do the
exercise

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

***

IV/
V/

*Post - reading : Interview a member of the Boys 
Scouts of American

- Call on an excellent student in class to practice with
the teacher .

- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs

Interview Member of BSA

1. When did scouting
begin ?

2. When were the
aims established ?
3. Can a girl join the
BSA ?

4 . How many
members does the
Scouting Association
have now ?

5. Is it the largest
voluntary Youth
Organization in the
world ?

- In 1907 in England
- They were established in
1907 . They are building the
characters , good citizenship
and personal fitness .

- No , It is mainly for boys

but girls can join similar
organization such as the Girl
Guides Association or the
Coeducational Camp fire
Boys and Girls .

Over 25 million
- Yes, Of course

Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson .
*/ Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and write the summary of
the BSA.

2. Prepare the next lesson

Work in open pairs
- Interview a member of
the BSA.

Listen and copy

- Work in group of 3 or
four

- Some Ss to retell the
main points .

- Copy down

homeworks.

Unit 6 : The young pioneers club

Teaching date : 19 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 38

Lesson 5 :

Writing

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter about a future 
plan using be going to

II.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , board, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: T asks some questions – call 2 Ss answer : c and d (57)

+ Keys: 1. Girls can join in the : “ The Girl guides Association …

2. The three aims of the …..
=> Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

2.

*Warm up : Revision of the structure Be going to

- Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a
future plan . Get Ss to make the sentence :

“ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin with
a letter from A to Z :

Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation .
S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle
S2 : I am going to clean the floor .
S3 : I am going to dust the furniture ..

Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and 
some new words to Ss .

** Pre – teach vocabulary : 
- to raise fund ( translation )
- a bank ( visual )

- natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the ground or
the sea .

* Reading the notice

Play game

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

3.

4.

II/

III/

IV

- Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y members
of the school “

- Ask some questions to check their understanding
a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in the
recycling program ?

b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ?
c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y
participate in ?

- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Give feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs .
* Complete the letter

- Ask some questions to set the scene :
- Who writes the letter ? ( Nga )

- To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )
- Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes )

- What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes
about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is
going to participate )

- Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter .
- Give feedback :1. community 2.recycling 3.collect
4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn

8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping

- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct
mistakes if any .

* Reading the dialogue :Set the scene“Hoa talks to her 
aunt about the Y and Y Green Group, about the activities
that she is going to do .”

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt .
* Checking : Some questions :

a. Why does Hoa look happy ?

b. What is she going to do in the environment month ?
c.What are they doing to earn money for their school
Y & Y ?

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in front
of the class .

*While - writing :

- Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents .
- Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on
poster . Move around the class and help then if they are
necessary .

*Post - writing :

- Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them on the
board. Get the whole class to read the 4 letters and
correct them .

- Give feedback : * Suggested letter

Dear Mom and Dad ,

I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in the
Y & Y Green Group of my school .

The green Group is holding an environment month plan .
We are going to clean the lakes,banks on weekends . We
are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and
water them every afternoon after class . We are planting
young trees and plants to sell to other schools . I hope
that we can bring more green to the city and earn some
money for the school Y&Y . The program is very
interesting and useful , is not it ?

I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more

about the group activities later .

With love ,

Hoa .

Read the notice and
answer the questions

Practice asking and
answering the questions
in pairs

Listen and answer
( the whole )

Work in pairs to
complete the letter .

Read the complete letter
.

Listen and copy .

Practice asking and
answering the
questions .

Work in groups to write
the letter

Stick their letters on the
board and correct its
mistakes

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

*Homeworks:

Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her
parents in their notebooks .

Listen and copy .

Teaching date : 22 / 11 / 2008 .

PERIOD 39 :

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure

grammar from unit 3 to unit 6 .

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

***

II/

III/

IV/

+ Một số động từ thờng đứng trớc danh động từ:

(to) finish - (to)delay

(to) prevent(ngăn cản) - (to)enjoy

(to) avoid(tránh) - (to) try

(to) deny( chối) - (to)like

(to)dislike = don’t like = doesn’t like

…

+ Modal verbs: May / can / could .

* May: Dùng để chỉ sự cho phép .

eg: May I use your phone?

May I go out ?



May còn dùng để diễn tả ý đề nghị giúp ngời

khác làm gì. Cách dùng này chỉ phép lịch sự

của ngời nói.

eg: May I help you?

May I carry the box for you ?

Yes. That’s very kind of you.

* Can / Could : cã thÓ

- Thờng dùng để diễn tả khả năng, năng lực có thể

làm gì.

- could lµ qu¸ khø cđa can.

eg: He can play piano.

Can you swim ?

He can lift heavy stone (có thể nhấc hịn đá nặng).



Ngồi ra can / could cịn có thể dùng đề nghị

ai giúp đỡ mình làm việc gì.( Asking for

favors )

eg: Could you help me , please ?

Could you do me a favor?

Can you lift the box for me, please ?

**.

Present tense with future meaning:

=> We use simple present tense to express an action
that happens in the future .

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the cues in the books.

Exercises:



Use gerund or infinitive:

1. I can’t help (feel)

……

. anxious ( lo âu, băn

khoăn) about her study.

2. He likes ( begin)

. knitting ( công việc

đan len) but hates ( finish)

……

it .

3. He loves ( swim)

…

. in the early morning.

4. Why do you watch the milk (boil)

…

over ?

5. Most people prefer ( ride)

…

to ( walk)

…

.

6. She has stopped ( drink)

…

wine before

breakfast.

7. If you keep ( make)

…

such a noise , she’ll

complain.

8. It no use ( attempt)(cố gắng làm cái gì)

.

(have)

dinner in 2 minutes.

9. Do you mind ( see)

…

these photos again?

10.I remember ( try)

…

ti dress myself for the

first time.

T asks Ss to do exercises . asks they practice

in pairs.

-Some others to go to the board to do.

-T gets feedback and give answer keys.

* Consolidation:

Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down

Listen carefully

Repeat the uses of the “
Asking for favors /
offering assistance and
how to respond “

Work in pairs to give the
example

Practice asking and
answering to draw the
form

Copy down .

Practice asking and
answering the questions
about the Y&Y activity .

Listen and copy .

Work in groups of three or
four

-Do exercises

Report their results .

Practice speaking the
dialogue

- Some Ss to retell the
mains points.

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

Teaching date : 22 / 11 / 2008 .

PERIOD 39 :

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure

grammar from unit 3 to unit 6 .

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.
a)

b)

Warm up : Brainstorming 
*Possible answers :

- Clean up the streets
- Help elderly people
- Take part in sports

- Help handicappied / street children
- Collect and empty garbage …..
** Presentation :

Present tense with future meaning

Pre

–

teach vocabulary

- a ret home : a place where old or sick people are cared
for

- an orphanage : a place where children without parents
live

- a stadium ( picture )

* Checking : Rub out and remember

Setting the scene

: Introduce the dialogue “ Lan and
Mai are members of the Y&Y organization . They are
talking about the summer activity program”

Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai : at Dong Xuan Market .

Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………?
Mai : On January 9

Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..?
Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to
practice the dialogue .

- Give feedback
*Keys:

1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage
4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at
c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to check
their understanding

a. When do we “ where “ ?
b. When do we use “ when “ ?
c. When do we use “ what time “ ?
d. Is the date at present or in the future ?
e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ?

Play game

Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down

Play game
Listen carefully

Work in pairs to practice
the dialogue

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

2)

3)

II/
III/

=> We use simple present tense to express an action that
happens in the future .

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the following cues

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
- Give feedback

Gerunds :

* Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving 
* Survey :

- Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends
and stick on the chart .

- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,
hobbies .

Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like cooking
and especially hate washing dishes . ..

Modals : may , can , could

- Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance ,
asking for favors and how to respond .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
the class .

- Give feedback

a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ?
B : Can you take me across the road ?

C : Could you help me with this math problem ?
D : Can you water the flowers in the garden?
b / A : May I help you ?

A : Do you need any help ?
B : Let me help you .

A : Yes . That is very kind of you .

- Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the class .

* Consolidation:

-Retell the main points of this lesson.

*Homework :

1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Copy down .

Practice asking and
answering the questions
about the Y&Y activity .
Listen and copy .

Work in groups of three
or four

Report their results .
Repeat the uses of the “
Asking for favors /
offering assistance and
how to respond “

Practice speaking the
dialogue

Listen and copy .

Teaching date : 24 / 11 / 2008 .

period 40 :

TEST

(45min)

ENGLISH 8 (No 2)

I.(3ps) Choose the best answer to complete the sentences:

1. We ought

…………

the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed.

A. put

B. push C. to put D. to push

2. Lan was born in VIET NAM .Vietnamese is her ...

A. mother tongue B. second language C. foreign language

3. We try to learn all new words ...heart

A. from B. by C.for

4.Many language leaners don't learn all new words they come...

A. along B. with C. across

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

A. In order that B. In order to C. In order

6. When I was a little girl, I used to ... my father’s advice.

A. listen

B. listen to

C. listening to

II. (2ps) Put the verbs in to the correct tenses:

1.The boys like (play) ... games but hate doing lessons.

2.We (start) ... our work on Monday and finish on Thursday.

3.My sister likes ( plant)

…………

roses in the garden.

4.The tourist needs (find)

…

.... the police station because he’s lost money.

III.(3ps) Arrange the words or phrases into the correct sentence:

1.her / has to / Lan / chores / do.

………

2.Nga / did / fail / why / English test / her ?

………

3.Because / didn’t learn/ her / she / lesson carefully.

………

IV. (2 ps) change the following sentences in to reported speech:

1/ " Please open your book" Nam said to Hoa.

Nam asked ………

2/ " You should practice speaking English more" Nga said to me.

Nga told .

Chữ kí giáo viên Ch÷ kÝ phơ huynh.
……… ………

Testing date: 24 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 40

Test( no 2 )

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge

they have learnt form unit 3 to unit 6 so that they can supplement what they

are short of .

II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

II. Checking up:

III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson .

- Deliver test papers to Ss .

I / Complete the sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the

bracket

1. ……….. problem , sir ! ( any / without / no )

2. ………, I help you , madam ? ( should / may / need )

3. Yes . That is very …………of you . ( help / kind / fine )

4. Could you ………….. me a favor ? ( do / make / take )

5. I am ………….. . I am really busy . ( pity / not good / sorry )

6. Do you…………. any help ? ( have / need / think )

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

II / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the

brackets

1. Tom is not here . He ……….. to work . ( has gone / went / goes / have

gone )

2. I can not find my bike . I think someone ………it. (stole/ has stolen /has

stole/ has stealed )

3. What time………your homework ? ( have you finished / did you

finished / did you finish / have you finish )

4. How long …….. from her? ( have not heared / have not heard / did not

you hear / you have not heard )

5. The hens ……….4 eggs this weeks . ( have lied / have lay / have lain /

have laid )

6. I ……… Peter for a long time . ( knew / has known / have known /

know )

7. I ………….. learning English three years ago . ( started / have started /

start / was starting)

8. The moon……….. around the Earth . ( goes / went / is going / go )

III/ Rewrite these sentences as directed

1. “ Please lend me my book , Lan , “ said Hoa . = > Hoa asked …………

2. “ I will pay back the money . “ said she . => She promised………..

3. “ You should practice speaking English every day , “ => The teacher said

we …..

4. “ Could you help me ? “ Mrs Jackson said to Mary . => Mrs Jackson

…………..

IV / Complete the dialogue

A : ……….. , please ?

B : Sure . What can I do you for you ?

A : ……….carry the suitcase for me ? It is heavy .

B : Certainly . I will help you .

A : Thank you very much .

B : ……… .

V / Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions below .

It was the first lesson after the summer holidays at a small school in

England . The lesson was about the seasons of the year . “ There are four

seasons in the year , “ said the teacher . “ They are Spring , Summer ,

Autumn and Winter . In Spring it is warm and everything begins to grow . In

summer it is hot and there are many flowers in the fields and gardens . In

Autumn there are many vegetables and much fruit . Everybody likes to eat

fruit . In summer it is cold and it often rains . Sometimes there is snow on

the ground . “

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

“ Yes , sir , “ answered Tom . “ It is when the farmer is not at home and

there is not dog in the garden . “

Questions :

1. Where did the lesson take place ?

2. What was the lesson about ?

3. What did the teacher ask Tom to do ?

4. What was Tom

s answer ?

Ch÷ kí giáo viên

Chữ kí phụ huynh hs

The end ………

Unit 7 : My neighborhood

Teaching date: 26 / 11 / 2008 .

Period 41:

Lesson 1

:

Getting started +

Listen and read + language focus 1

–

2

–

3

.

A/The aims:

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson . Ss will be able to know more

about Na

s new neighbor .

II Teaching aids

: Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk ..

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization

:- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

III. New lesson:
***

I.
1.

2.

***

*Warm up : Getting started

- Ask Ss to match the names of places with

the suitable pictures

- Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss

know exactly what they mean

* Answers :

a. grocery store b. stadium

c. wet market d. drug store

e. hairdresser

s f. swimming pool

*Pre - reading

: Introduce the topic of the

passage reading and some new words .

+ Pre – teach vocabulary

- close by (adv) : a short distance

- to serve : give sb food or drink

- a pancake : banh ran

- tasty (a) = delicious (a)

* Checking vocabulary : What and where 
Guiding questions :

- Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking

about the place where they live . But Na is

new there . “

Questions :

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and copy .
Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down

Play game

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

II/
1

2.

3.

***

III/

IV.
V/

a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ?
b. Where does Na want to go ?

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the

answers and call on some Ss to read their

predictions and write them on the board .

While - reading :

Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between

Nam and Na then ask them if their answers

are correct or not .

- Give feedback :

a. He has lived there for 10 years .

b. Na wants to go to a restaurant .

* Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually , then
compare with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback : a. new b. last week c. tired

d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes

* Answers given :

- Give Ss some answers and ask them to make

questions

a. Nam has lived here for 10 years .

b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook .

c. The restaurant serves Hue food .

d. Hue food is very good.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and
answering

=> Questions

a. How long has Nam lived here ?
b. Is Na,s mother tired ?

c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ?
d. What is the food like ?

** Post - reading : Write

- Ask Ss to write a passage about their neighborhood by
answering the following questions

a. How long have you lived in your neighborhood ?

b. Do you like it ? Why ?

c . Is there a restaurant / post – office / market /

bank / shop in your neighborhood ?

d.How do you do to keep your neighborhood clean ?

- Move around the class and help Ss

- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
- Correct mistakes .

* Consolidation:

-Retell the main points of this leson.
* Homework :

1. Write the complete writing about their neighborhood .
2. Do exercise in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

the guiding questions .
Report their predictions .
Read the dialogue to
check their predictions
- Teacher give them
marks if necessary.
Work individually

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions

- T give them marks if
necessary.

Open pairs -> closed
pairs

Write individually
Demonstrate their

writings in front of
class.

Listen and copy down
homeworks.

Unit 7

My neighborhood

Period 42

lesson 2

:

speak

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to

send parcels or letters .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Two Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue.

- Two others to go to the board to do exercises,Using the present perfect

with “since” and “for”:

1. The Robinsons / live / Hn / 2001. =>

2. They / be / Nha Trang / 2 days. =>

-> Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

2.

***

II/

III/
1

* Warm up : + Chatting

- Show a letter and ask Ss some questions
+ What is this ?

+ Where can I post it to my friend ?
+ How can I post it ?

+ How much ?

+ Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ?
+ Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?

 Lead in the new lesson .
* Presentation :

+ Pre- teach vocabulary :

- air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air

- surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or ship
…

- Parcel ( n) buu pham buu kien.
- charge (v / n ) : le phi, cuoc phi.
* Checking : Rub out and remember
+ Reading comprehension

- Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui
Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .”

- Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to
compare their answers .

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers
a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface
mail ? Why ?

b. What is the weight of her parcel ?
c. How much does she pay ?

- Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions
* Answers :

a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it is

much cheaper .

b. Her parcel is five kilograms .
c. She pays 19, 200 dongs .
** Practice :

- Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and practice
the dialogue with teacher ( clerk )

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Correct
their pronunciation

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of
class .

* Further practice :

- Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue
+ Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down

( whole class )
Play game

Listen carefully .
Work in pairs

Read the dialogue to
fine out the answers .

Practice asking and
answering the
questions .

Practice the dialogue
with teacher .

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

*

2.
3.
4.

IV/
V/

- Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the clerk
in the post office .

- Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue
themselves .

Expected dialogue

Clerk : Can I help you ?

Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom .

Clerk :Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ?
Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ?

Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is only 
1,200 dongs .

Mrs Lan : Here you are . 
Clerk : Thank you .

- Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs 
- Give Ss some situations :

2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g
3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg

4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs .

- Divide class into 3 groups , each prepares a dialogue
- Call on 2 pairs from each group to practice their
dialogue .

- Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues and
move around class to help Ss .

* Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Practice the dialogues ,
using the situations .
( whole class )

Work in pairs

Work in groups
Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs
Listen and copy .

Unit 7

My neighborhood

Teaching date: 1 /12 / 2008 .

Period 43

Lesson 3

: Listen + Language focus 4

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what Na is going

to do on the weekend by listening .

II. Teaching aids :

Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan. posters.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I . Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

Two Ss go to the board to make the similar dialogue about to send a letter or parcel.

- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***
1.
2.

3.

* Warm up : Brainstorming and guessing

- Ask Ss to look at 4 advertisements of “ what is on this
week ? “ and get Ss to guess what is in the bank 2-3-4
* Movies

* Place -> Stadium 
School ground
City

Town ground
* Activity -> drama / play

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

4.
I/
II/
1.
2.
3.
III/
IV/
V/

English Speak Club / Contest
Dancing

Picture Exhibition
Music

* Place -> Gallery

Culture house
School

City hall
*Pre - listening :

- Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood . She is
talking to Nam about what she is going to do on the

weekend .”

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the answers
and fill in the blanks in each advertisement

* While - listening : 
+ Listening task :

- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers
- Give feedback

a. The new comer b. Town Ground
c. English speaking contest d . Culture House
Listening task 2 :

- Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66
- Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has
no information

- Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends .
- Give feedback

- Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the
correct boxes : True ? False or No information

Statements T F No

a. Na does not know the b
neighborhood very well
b. Na does not like movies

c. Na will go to the photo
exhibition this weekend

d. Na will not go to the English
speaking Contest

e. Na will go to the soccer match
with Nam

f. Nam is a soccer fan .

X
X
X
X
X
X
+ Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of
the conversation .

- Turn on the tape again .
a. Does Na like movies ?

b. Why will not she go to see the film “The New comer
“ ?

c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ?
d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ?

e. What time does the match start ?

* Post - Listening :

- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about
what Na is going to do this weekend .

- Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the
whole class about Na .

Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of the lesson.

* Homework :

1. Write a short passage about what Na is going to do .
2. Do exercises in workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

- Look at 4

advertisements of :
“What is on this week ?”
- And then get Ss to
guess what is in the
bank 2-3-4.

Listen and copy

Work individually

Work in pairs
Listen to the

conversation again and
tick in the corrects
boxes

Practice asking and
answering the questions.
( whole class )

- Work in pairs

- Answer the questions.
Work in group .

Talk about What Na is
going to do this

weekend.

- Some Ss retell the main
points .

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

PERIOD 44 :

TRả và Chữa Bài Kiểm Tra

Answer for written test 2

(grade 8)

** Giáo viên đa đáp ỏn.- cha tng phn .

Sửa lỗi học sinh hay mắc phải.

Nhận xét bài kiểm tra.

Gọi điểm.

I.(3 points):

1. C

2.A

3.B

4.C

5.B

6.B

II.(2 points):

1.playing

2.start

3.planting

4.to find

III.(3 points):

1.Lan has to do her chores.

2 2.Why did Nga fail her English test ?

3.Because she didn t learn her lesson carefully.

’

IV.(2 points):

1. Nam asked Hoa to open her book.

2. Nga advised me to practice speaking English more.

………

The end

…………

..

Unit 7 :

My neighborhood

Teaching date: 6 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 45

lesson 4 :

Read + Language focus 5

A / The aims

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- Develop Ss reading skill .

II. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board , posters and lesson plan.

B / Steps of the lesson :

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance .
II. Checking up :

- Ask 2 Ss to go to the board to answer some questions say about contents of the last
lesson .- T corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

I/
1.

2.

II/

**

**
**

as quickly as possible .

1. a place where you can buy everything

2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit .
3. A place where you can buy books .

4. A place where you can come to eat .

5. A place where you can come to see the movies .
6. A person who comes to the store and buys something.
=> Lead in the new lesson

** Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 
reading and some new words to Ss :

* Pre – teach vocabulary :
- a roof ( picture )

- convenient = thuan loi

- a selection = a process of choosing carefully .
- available = san co de dung , co the de dung
- a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies
theaters are under one roof .

- a resident = cu dan

* Checking vocabulary : What and where

*. Brainstorming :

- Set the scene “ In Nam,s neighborhood , there is a new 
shopping mall .

- Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .
 Possible answers :

- wide selection of goods

- lower prices / buy many things at the same time
- have fun or relax while shopping

- Lower prices wide selection of goods

*While - reading

- Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their or get
more information .

- Give feedback

- Explain the meanings of some phrases rapidly
+ under one roof + shop in comfort

+ take their business + offer a wider selection
+ especially stores + have been concerned about
* True / False statements

- Have Ss look at the statements in the box and get them
to read the text again and decide which statements are
true , which are false .

Statements True False

1. A mall is open six days a week .
2. There are more than 50 stores in the
mall .

3. Everyone in the neighborhood is
pleased about the new mall .

4. It will be more comfortable to shop
in the mall than in the present shopping
area .

5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu
Street may have to close .

- Have Ss correct the false statements
1. The mall is open daily

2. There are 50 stores in the mall .

3. Not everyone is pleased . The owner of the small
stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy .

* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in the

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and copy
Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down .

Play games .

Listen and do the task

Read them aloud and
copy .

Work individually

Ss look at the statements
in the box and get them
to read the text again
and decide which
statements are true ,
which are false .
Work in pairs
Ss correct the false
statements

- One by one

- Play a game in two
teams.

- Ss to answer the

77 The convenience of the

new shopping mall

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

Unit 7 :

My neighborhood

Teaching date: 8 /12 / 2008 .

Period 46

Lesson 5

:

write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a

notice .

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

???

I/

1.

2.

*
*
*
**

*
*
*
*

*Warm up : * Chatting

1. Have you ever written a notice ?

2. To whom ?

3. What for ?

4. What type ?

=> Lead in the new lesson .

* Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing

and the scene “ The residents and store owners on

Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to

discuss the effects of the new mall . “

* Pre- teach vocabulary :

- effects (n) = tac dong , tac dung , hieu qua

- contact (v) = lien lac

- hardware store = dung cu dong dung trong nha

* Guiding questions

a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran

Phu street going to hold a meeting ?

b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ?

c. Where will they hold the meeting ?

- Get Ss to read the notice and answer some

questions to check their understanding.

- Call on some pairs to practice asking

answering the questions .

- Give feedback

a. To discuss the effects of the new mall

b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m

c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao

Street , Binh

s hardware store .

- Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full
sentences .

* Reading :

- Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some

Play game
( whole class)

Listen and copy .
- Repeat in chorus.
Work in pairs

Read individually
Practice asking and
answering the questions.

Work in the whole class.
Ss to read the passage
and ask some questions
to check their

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

II/

***

III/

IV/
V/

questions to check their understanding , get

them to use short answers .

1. What is the English Speaking club going to hold ?

2. Where and when will it be held ?

3. What time ?

4. Who is the person contact ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and

answering the questions .

* While -writing :

- Get Ss to write the notice individually
- Monitor and help them write

- Ask Ss to share with their partners
- Check some notices and correct them
- Write the model notice on the board

Date : November 15

Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm

Place : Hall 204 , Building G

Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class

8H at the above address for more information .

*Post - writing :

- Ask Ss to write one notice about their class meeting
- Get them to work in group

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback .

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson .
*Homework :

1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises in workbook .

Work in pairs
Practice asking and
answering the questions.

Work individually
Work in pairs
Whole class

Read the correct notice

Ss to write one notice
about their class meeting

Work in group

- Retell the main points .
Listen and copy down
homeworks.

Unit 7 : My neighborhood

Teaching date: 10 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 47:

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use Present Perfect

Tense and some adjectives to make comparisons .

Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

I/
*
***
***

1
2.
*
3.
4.
*
***
board.

- Divide the class into 2 teams

- Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write

each pair of infinitive – past participle

be see collected go worked
lived do seen eat attended
write been written eaten work
attend done live collect gone

Answers :

be – been ; write – written ; go – gone
live – lived ; see – seen ; collect – collected
do – done attend – attended ;eat – eaten
work – worked

- Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past
participles of irregular verbs .

* Presentation :

- Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,s neighborhood . 
They are talking to each other .”

- Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na , then
ask them to complete it

Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ?
Nam : I ... here …..10 years .

Na : Really . It is a long time .

* Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for
- Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to practice
in pairs .

=> Form : have / has + past participle

* Use : to talk about something which started in the
past and continues up to the present

We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the Present
Perfect Tense : For + length of time

Since + starting point
 Exercises :

* Ex 2 :

- Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is

the length of time and which is starting point .

- Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For
- Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since
* Ex 3 : - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to
make full sentences .

- Correct their pronunciation

Example : I / live / here / last week
 I have lived here since last week
*.Ex 4: Ask Ss to complete the conversations
- Have them work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

1. have been 2. hope 3. have lived 4. is
5. want 6. looks 7. have been 8. have seen

- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs .
*. Ex 5 * Game : Pelmanism

different cheap expensive long same

modern short big small

- Show Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one which
have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then
ask Ss to make comparisons

Example :

- The red book is the same as the yellow one
- The red book is as big as the yellow one
- The yellow book is different from the brown
dictionary .

- The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary .

Play game
( whole class )
write each pair of
infinitive – past
participle

Repeat chorally ,

individually , then copy
Listen and copy

Work in pairs
Practice in front of
class .

Listen and copy .

Ss to look at exercise 2 /
69 and decide which is
the length of time and

which is starting point .
- Read out a phrase , and
Ss to add Since or For
- Go on until Ss can
remember how to use
For/Since

Work on the whole class

Work individually

Work in pairs

Work in groups

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

Unit 8

Country life and city life

Teaching date: 12 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 48

lesson 1

:

Getting started

Listen and read + language focus 5

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city life and 
the country life .

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.
- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson: 
***

I/
1.

*

II/
1.

* Warm up : * Chatting

- Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country
by asking some questions

1. Where do you live ?

2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ?

3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ?

=> Lead in the new lesson

* Pre -reading : Introduce the topic of the passage

reading and some new words .

*. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- a relative = uncles , aunts cousins
- peaceful = quiet and calm (a)

- permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time
- accessible = co the den gan duoc

- medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember

* Brainstorming ( Getting started )

- Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The
words in the box of getting started may help you .

 Possible answers :

- tall buildings - beautiful views
- plenty kinds of goods - fresh food
- polluted air - fresh air
- traffic jams - friendly

- entertainment - peaceful busy
** While – reading :

*. True / false statements

Statements True False

1. Na lives in the city

2. Na went to a village which has
some relatives lives there .

3. The village is very peaceful and
quiet

4. Hoa prefers the city life

x
x
x

x
- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to
predict the true / false statements .

- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write

Chatting

( whole class )

Listen and copy

Listen and repeat
chorally

Copy down
Play game

Ss to talk about city life
and country life.

- Play agame in two
teams.

Work in groups

Work in groups to
predict

city life

country

life

country

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

2.

III/

IV/
V/

them on the board.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and
compare their ideas

- Give feedback and get more information
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
*. Comprehension questions :

- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in
ex 2 / 73

- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the
questions in front of class .

- Give feedback

a. Na has been to Kin Lien village 
b. She was there for the weekend

c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and 
there is nothing to do .

d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket , 
no zoos …

e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote area 
are getting electricity . People can now have things like 
refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more 
accessible .

- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs
**/ Post - reading : *Discussion

- Divide the class into 4 groups . Two groups include Ss
who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who
prefer the country life .

- Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions
“ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “
- Call on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas
before class .

** Consolidation: - Retell the main points .

** Homework : Learn by heart new words and copy 
two lines for each word .

– Copy the answers in their notebooks .
- Prepare the next lesson .

Read the dialogue ,
compare their ideas
Practice the dialogue in
pairs

Work in pairs

- some pairs to practice
asking answering the
questions in front of

class .

Practice asking and
answering the questions

Work in groups

Demonstrate their ideas
in front of class .

- Retell the main points .
Listen and copy down
homeworks.

Unit 8

Country life and city life

Teaching date: 15 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 49.

lesson 2

: Speak + language focus 1

–

2 .

A /

The aims

:

I . Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice speaking

about the changes of a place

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , pictures , poster , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I . Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up : - Asks 2 Ss to do exercises :

a) Many lakes / rivers / become / dry . =>

b) Weather / get / worse . =>

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

* Warm up and pre - speaking

Word square

- Ask Ss to find out 7 adjectives

E

X

P

E

N

S

I

B

O

A

M

D

N

U

V

E

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

I/
***

II/

***

**

***

III/

U

B

O

I

S

V

E

A

I

C

D

R

T

R

U

Y

L

E

T

L

A

T

S

M

R

Y

H

G

I

U

O

N

O

I

S

Y

F

B

P

T

F

D

E

L

U

- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams

- Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they

find

- The team which circles more words will win the

game .

Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall –

expensive – beautiful



Setting the scene “ Hoa

s grand father is 78 “

- Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger

than she is now .

- Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health

=> Hoa

s grand father is getting weaker

+ Form : am / is / are + V-ing

+ Use : used to describe changes with get and

become

**While

–

speaking

:

- Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and

talk to their partners about the changes of the town .

The words in the box under the pictures may help

you

- Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can

speak easily

- traffic - > busy

- sky -> cloudy

- houses -> high

- city -> beautiful

- trees - > green

- Get Ss to work in pairs

- Monitor and help Ss speak

* Possible answers :

- The traffic is getting busier .

- There are more tall buildings and houses .

- The houses are getting more modern

- The town is becoming more beautiful .

- The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier

* Language focus 1 : Ask Ss to practice the

dialogue as example

S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?

S2 : Is that good fortune ?

S1 : That is right

S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .

S1 : Oh , no !

S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45

- Give them the shipping information and ask them

to make similar dialogues

** Language focus 2 : Complete the dialogue.Use

the verbs in the present progressive tense .

- Asks Ss do ex in pairs. then to go ti the board to

rewrite on the board.

Ss to find out 7

adjectives.

Ss to go to the board

and circle the word

they find

Work in the whole

class .

Listen and copy

Work in pairs

- Ss to look at the two

pictures on page 73

and talk to their

partners about the

changes of the town

Ss to work in pairs

Ss to practice the

dialogue as example

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

IV/
V/

* Post - speaking :

- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in

their hometown / neighborhood .

- Call on volunteer from each group to show their

ideas before the class . Other groups can add in their

ideas .

Consolidation:Retell the main points of this lesson.

* Homework :

Write some sentences , using Present Progressive

Tense to describe changes in their school

Ss do ex in pairs. then

to go ti the board to

rewrite on the board.

Listen and copy down

homeworks.

Unit 8

Country life and city life

Teaching date: 17 / 12 / 2008.

Period 50:

lesson 3:

Listen + Language focus 3 + 4

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete the dialogue by 
listening . Then do exercises in Language focus 3 + 4.

- Develop Ss’ listening skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , cards , cassette , lesson plan, posters

, radio , CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson :

I . Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks 2 Ss to go to the board to talk about the changes of their town or 
their villages in five years ago.

- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/

II/

***

Warm up : * Matching

- Prepare eight cards with phrases on them

- Write eight verbs on the board ( play , do , watch , go ,
clean , have , phone , speak )

- Divide the class into 2 teams
- Hand out each team 8 cards

- Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the
suitable verbs

- The team which is faster is the winner
* Answers :

- play table tennis
- do my homework
- watch a program

- go to a violin lesson
- clean the house

- have a meeting

- phone my aunt , Mrs Hang
- speak to Mom

=> Lead in the new lesson .
* Pre - listening

- Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the
phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “

- Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue .
- Call on some Ss to report their predictions
* While - listening :

- Turn on the tape and check their predictions

- Let them listen twice and find out the missing words
individually .

- Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners
- Call some Ss to read their results

Give feedback

Work in group

Ss to stick the cards with
phrases besides the
suitable verbs
Listen and repeat
chorally and
individually
Copy down
Listen and copy
Work in groups to
predict .

Listen to the tape to
check their predictions
Listen again and share

their answers with their
friends .

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

III/
**

**

IV/
V/
VI/

1. that 2. this 3. It is 4. where
5. from 6. coming 7. next week 8. arriving
9. Thursday 10 . late 11. afternoon 12
. speak 13. my 14 . get her.

Language focus:

* Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe
changes with “ get “ and “ become “

* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues
a. The boys / get / tall

b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark

d. The weather / get / cold
e. The students / get / better

f. The school yard / become / cleaner

- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually

- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class
can remember the structure .

* Comparative and superlative adjectives

- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative
adjectives

* Comparative :

Short adj - er + than + object

More long adj + than + object

* Superlative : The + short adjective - est

The most + long adjective

* Irregular adjectives

good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least

* Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country .

Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they
have made .

- Give feedback
* Post - listening

- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Aunt Hang to
practice the dialogue .

* Consolidation : 
- Retell the main points
* Homework :

1. Copy down the completed dialogue in their notebooks
2. Do exercises in work book

3. Prepare the next lesson .

aloud .

Work in pairs to practice
the dialogue

Look at the board.
Work in pairs.
- Do LF 3+ 4 .

whole class repeat

chorally , then some Ss
read out individually
Asks Ss to retell the
main structure grammar
about the forms of
comparative and
superlative adjectives .
- One by one.

Ss work in pairs to make
comparisons between
the city and the country .
- Each Student read
aloud one of the
sentences they have
made .

- Ss to play the roles of
Lan and Aunt Hang to
practice the dialogue .
- Retell the main points
- One by one.

Listen and copy down
homeworks.

Unit 8 : Country life and city life

Teaching date : 20 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 51.

lesson 4

:

Read

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text about 
one of the social problems .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.
II. Checking up :

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

2.
***

II/

1.

2.

*Warm up : * Jumbled words

- Write the words with disordered letters on the board .

+ Fulentipl -> plentiful

+ taneru -> nature
+ loofd -> flood
+ roestdy -> destroy
+ viroped -> provide
+ suertl -> result
+ ciliestial -> facilities

- Ask them to write the correct words on the board and
repeat chorally , individually

=> Lead in the new lesson .
* Pre- reading :

- Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words to Ss .

* Pre - teach vocabulary :

- rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside
- urban ( adj ) > < rural

- strain (n) = su qua tai ( dan so )
- typhoon (n) = storm (n)

- drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time
-( to )struggle = dau tranh

- migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to

another especially in order to find work .

- (to) increase = tang len , tang them , Gia tang.
* Checking vocabulary : What and where 
*. Brainstorming :

- Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmer s, life .
Possible answers :

droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations / lack
of clean water / electricity / insects destroy harvests ..
- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal
with difficulties

- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write
them on the board .

*While - reading :

- Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to
check their predictions .

- Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their
problem ? “

=> They have to move to the city so that they can get
well – paid jobs .

- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class .
* Gap- filling :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using
the information from the passage .

- Call on some volunteers to report their results
- Give feedback

1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural

5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals 
 9. problem 10 . world

- Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud
*Finding the words

- Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their
partners

Work in group

Listen and copy down

Listen and repeat
chorally , individually ,
then copy down .
Play game

Copy down new lesson.
Work individually.

Work in groups to guess
how farmers deal with
difficulties

Some Ss to report their
predictions and write
them on the board .

Demonstrate in front of
class

Ss listen to the tape and
read the text silently to
check their predictions .
- Work individually.
-Some Ss to read the text
in front of class .

Ss to work in pairs o
complete summary ,
using the information
from the passage .
Listen to the tape and
read the text to check
their predictions
Answer the question

Difficulties of farmer s, life

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

III/

*

IV/
V/

- Call them to report their results
- Give feedback

a. rural b. plentiful c. increase

d. strain e. tragedy f. urban

*Post - reading : Discussion

- Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what would
you do for farmers ?

- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss
* Suggested answers :

- build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside
- build schools , hospitals

- provide clean water , electricity , facilities
- build factory .

- Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas
before the class .

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
*Homework :

1. Write 5 things that government should do for the rural
areas .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs

Read their results .

Read the complete
summary .

Read the text again and
do the exercise 2 / 75
Read the complete
results .

Work in groups to
discuss

Show their ideas before
class .

Listen and copy .

Unit 8

Country life and city life

Teaching date : 26 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 52 .

Lesson 5 :

write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a

letters to their friends about their neighborhood .

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs 1-2 in the book page 76

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

*

*Warm up : Revision

- Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the
correct order .

- Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them .

- Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order
- Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct
order .

- Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy .
1. Heading

- Writer,s address / Date

Work on the whole
class .

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

*
*
*
I/

II/

*

III/
IV/

V/

- Dear ………... ,
2. opening
3. Body
4. closing
*Pre- writing :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions

- Give feedback
*While … writing :

- Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their
neighborhood

- Let them write individually .

- Have them compare with their partners and correct if
they can .

* Suggested letter :

( Writer,s address)

( Date )

Dear ....,

I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a

large house with four rooms and a small

garden . My sister and I share one

bedroom . From the bedroom window , I

can see a beautiful park with green tress ,

flowers and a pond . we do not live far form

my school so I usually walk there .

In my neighborhood , there is a swimming

pool and a beautiful park . On the weekend ,

I often go swimming with my friends . Early

in the morning , I always jog with my sister

around the park . But the thing I like best in

my neighborhood is the public library near

my school . There I not only can study and

read books but also watch video and learn

how to use the computer .

Do you have a library like that in your

neighborhood ? Is there anything

interesting in the place where you live ?

Write to me. I would like to say goodbye

now.

I am looking forwards to hearing from you

soon.

Love ,

( Signature )

*Post - writing : * Correction

- Choose some letters to correct before class and ask
them to read them aloud .

* Consolidation:

- Reteel the main points of the letter.
*Homework :

1. Write their letters on their notebooks
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions

Work individually
Compare with their
partners

Ss to write letters to
friends about their
neighborhood

- Works individually.

Exchange their writings
to correct .

Listen and copy .

Choose some letters to
correct before class and
ask them to read them
aloud .

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Teaching date : 27 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 53 .

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure

grammar from unit 1 to unit 8 .

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/

II/

III/

*Warm up : *

Matching

A B Key

1. play
2. do
3. watch
4. go
5. clean
6. have
7. phone
8. speak

a. to Mom

b. table tennis
c. a program
d. a meeting

e. my aunt , Mrs Hang
f. the house

g. my homework
h. to violin lesson

1.b
2.g
3.c
4.h
5.f
6.d
7.e
8.a

- Call 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the matching
●

Grammar Unit 1 :

a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)

…

.

eg: I go on holiday twice a year.

* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used
to express an action which is always true .

b. Past simple :

S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + ….

eg:I missed the train this morning .

. (not) adjective + enough + to

–

infinitive

Eg: He is old enough to see that film .

She is not clever enough to do this thing . 
●

Grammar Unit 2:

Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce the form
and use of going to

- Form : S + be going to + infinitive 
- Use : express an intention

●

Grammar Unit 3

Reflexive Pronouns

- > Form : We use I with myself

You ... yourself / yourselves
He ...himself

She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ... themselves

It ... itself

Work in group
( 2 teams )

Work in pairs

Answer the questions

Work in pairs

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

***

IV/

- Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns :
Used to emphasize a person or a thing .

Eg : She cut herself .

John saw himself in the mirror .

*Ex 2 : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the Present
Progressive Tense to complete the exercise

- Get Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues before
class and correct

=> What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ?
What is the form ?

Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue . Are they
at present or in the future ?

* Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about the

future .

*Ex 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example

S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?
S2 : Is that good fortune ?

S1 : That is right

S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !

S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45

- Give them the shipping information and ask them to
make similar dialogues

*Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe
changes with “ get “ and “ become “

* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues
a. The boys / get / tall

b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark

d. The weather / get / cold
e. The students / get / better

f. The school yard / become / cleaner

- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually

- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class
can remember the structure .

* Comparative and superlative adjectives

- Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative
adjectives

* Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object 
 More long adj + than + object

* Superlative : The + short adjective - est 
 The most + long adjective

* Irregular adjectives

good/ well – better – the best
bad – worse – the worst
many – more – the most
little – less – the least
●

Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country .

Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they
have made .

- Give feedback
*Further practice :

- Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them some
questions to check their understanding

+ what are advertised ?

( an apartment , a villa and a house )

Repeat chorally ,

individually

Repeat the form of
comparative and
superlative adjectives

Listen and copy

Work in pairs

Listen and answer the
questions

Play game
( whole class )

Ss work in pairs to make
comparisons between
the city and the country .

Ss to read the

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

V/
VI/

+ How old are they ?

( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years old and the
house is new )

+ How much do we pay per month ?

( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million dongs for the
house and 7,8 million dongs for the villa )

- Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative and
superlative adjectives

old expensive big

expensive small hot

big beautiful old

Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment

- The house is more expensive than the apartment .
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of some Structure grammar.
*Homework :

1/Redo all the exercises and copy down
2/ Prepare the next lesson .

understanding
- Work in pairs.

- Some Ss to retell the
main structure grammar.

Listen and copy down
homeworks

Teaching date : 27 / 12 / 2008 .

Period 53

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to grasp (su nam bat dc, su

hieu thau.) knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to

supplement( bo sung ) what they are short of (tru phi)

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 8 .

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***
I/
**

* Warm up : Chatting about daily routine
*/ Consolidation :

1. Grammar

- Ask Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first
semester and write on the board

1.1. The tenses :

- Present Simple / - Past simple

Play game

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

***
III
1.

***
IV/
V/

- Present progressive / - Present perfect
- Simple future

1.2. The form of the verbs

- Modal verbs : can , could , may might

- Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like
/ dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions

- Have Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with
each one .

2. Exercises :

- Using the posters with some exercises to show .
2.1. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets +
Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund

+ Ex 5 / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect
- Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of lass

- Ask some Ss to go to the board to write them on the
board

- Give feedback

*Grammar:

1.2 Comparison
- Comparative
- Superlative
- Like

- (not) as …….. as
- (not) the same as
- different form

1.2 Direct and indirect speech
- Commands

- Requests
- Advice

=> S + told + O +(not) to + V …..
2. Exercises :

- Ex 7 / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison

- Ex 3 / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook )
+ Have Ss work in pairs to do all the exercises
+ Call on some pairs to practice in front of class
+ Give feedback

 Consolidation:

- Retel the main points of some Structure grammar .
 Homework :

1. Redo all the exercises and copy
2. Prepare the test :

- Complete these sentences with the suitable words or
phrases in the brackets .

- Complete the conversation

- Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions
below

- Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the
brackets

- Listening comprehension

Listen and copy , then
give some more
examples

Listen and copy
Repeat and copy .

Work in pairs to the
exercises and exchange

their answers with their
friends .

Listen and copy

Repeat and give some
more examples

Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of
class .

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Period 54

The first semester test

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge

they have learnt form unit 1to unit 8 so that they can supplement what they

are short of . Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they

have learnt to do the test well

II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

II. Checking up:

III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson .

- Deliver test papers to Ss .

I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases

in the brackets 2,0 Ps

1 . We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7. 30 and 8 . 15

2. Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English

language .

3. She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present .

4. Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister .)

5 . Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano .

6. When my uncle was young , he used ( go/ went /going/ to go )

fishing on Sundays

7. He ( left / has left / leaves ) for London a year ago .

8. I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years .

II /

Complete the conversation

: ( 2,0 Ps )

A : Can I help you ?

B : I would like ……… this parcel to Hanoi

A : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ?

B : I am not sure . ……….. is airmail ?

A : I will have ……….. the parcel first . Well , two kilograms . That

will be 9,000 dong

B : That is not very cheap . But ………..it airmail .

A : All right .

III / Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets :

( 2,0 Ps )

1. They ( live ) …………... in Hanoi for 20 years .

2. My aunt ( not go ) ……….. out of her house since she ( buy )

………. a color TV

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

IV/ Read the passage carefully . Then answer the questions below :

( 2,0 Ps )

Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night

market . In the evening , the main street is lined with small stands

and shops that sell almost anything you can imagine . Some stands

sell jewelry or clothing , others sell traditional Thai crafts and still

others sell fresh fruit and species . It is easy to spend an entire

evening just looking at everything . If you decide to buy something

, you will not be disappointed The prices are very reasonable . There

are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night

market is a favorite for many people .

1. Where is Chiang Mai ?

2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ?

3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ?

4. Are the prices expensive ?

V / Listening comprehension : You are going to listen twice .

Check (v) the correct box for True or False : ( 2,0 Ps )

Statements

True False

1. Ba is younger than Lan

2. Lan is shorter than her brother

3. Both Ba and Lan go to school in the

morning

4. They love pop music , reading novels .

5. They do not lke playing chess and going

swimming in summer .

6. Ba likes watching war films on TV

……… ..

The end

…………

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 8

The second semester

Unit 9 : A first aids course

Teaching date : 05 / 01 / 2009 .

Period 55

.

Lesson 1 :

Getting started +

Listen and read + Language focus 2.

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they would do in 
the situations which require first - aid.

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.
- T. corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

Time Teacher s activities’ Ss activitives’
***

***

I/
1.

2.

II/

**

III/

IV/

* Warm up : Kim,s game ( Getting started )

- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the things on
page 80 for 20 seconds . Tell them these things are often
used for first - aid

- Divide the class into two groups .

- Tell them the group having the most right English
words is the winner .

- Have them open the books again and go through the
words in English .

* Suggested answers :

1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing

3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6. alcohol

- Have them discuss and write down what they would do
in these situations which require first – aid

Possible answers :

+ A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water / ice to ease
the pain

+ A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol / medicated
oil / sterile dressing

+ A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to stop the
bleeding / tell her to lie down .

+ A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil …

*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 
reading and some new words .

+ Pre teach (Vocabulary ): 
- First- aid: (n) So cuu.

- (an) ambulance : xe cuu thuong (Pic)

- (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap
- unconscious (adj) > < conscious (adj) tinh tao
-( to) bleed : chay mau.

- Sterile dressing (n) : gac vo trung .

-> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks
* Checking technique: * Slap the board

( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board )

* Gap filling Prediction

- Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board .

There was an emergency at Lan,s school . A student

…..(1)…. off her bike and hit her head on the road . 
She was …..(2)…. but she cut her head and the …….
(3)…. was ……(4)….. badly . Lan telephoned Bach 
Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an ……(5)
….. to Quang Trung School . Lan was asked to keep 
the student …..(6)…. while waiting for the

ambulance .

- Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps
* While - reading :

- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue , then check their predictions
- Give feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut
4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake

* Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the topic
covered in the dialogue .

- Have Ss work in groups to write their answers on a
sheet of paper and hand in after finishing .

- Collect Ss , papers and give feedback : a- b- c- e- f

* Language focus 2 : - Revision the Future simple
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and

Whole class
Team work

- Ss to close their books
and go to the board to
write the names of the
things they have just
seen from memory .
- Whole class

Group work of 4/5 Ss
-Some groups to give
their answers and
correct

- Copy down new
lesson.

- Repeat in chorus.
T – Ss

Whole class

Team work

- Ss to go to the board
and write their words.

Individual work
T – Ss

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

1.
2.

V/
VI/

exchange their roles.

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :

1. will 2. will 3. won,t , 4. Shall 5. will 6. , ll
* Post - reading :

*Role play : - Have Ss in turn play the roles to 
demonstrate the dialogue .

* Write - it -up : Ask Ss to write a story using the

information from the dialogue .
- Tell Ss to begin their story with :

“ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “
- Monitor and help Ss with their work .

* Consolidation: - Retell the main points .
* Homework : - Learn by heart new words.

Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 ).

Pair work

- Ss to write a story
using the information
from the dialogue .
Individual work

- Retell the main

points.

- Listen and copy

down homeworks.

Unit 9 : A first aids course

Teaching date : 07 / 01 / 2009 .

Period 56

lesson 2

: Speak + language focus 3 , 4.

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to

requests , offers , and promises.

- Develop Ss’ speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have

just seen from memory .

=> T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

**
I/
1.
a.
b.
c.

+
+

+

● Warm up : * Net work

*

Possible answers :

- have a snake bite / have a burn / have a cut /

have a bee sting / have a nose bleed ...

*Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the

speaking and some models sentences .

* Set the scene :

- Ask Ss some questions to elicit the models

a. I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say? 
b. I would like you to come to my party. How can I say? 
c. I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work before

bedtime . How can I say ?

- Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on

the board ( underline the key words )

a. Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ?

b. Would you like to come to my party ?

c. I promise I will finish my homework before

Group work of 8 – 10

students

- Ss some questions to

elicit the models

- Ss repeat 2 or 3 times

before writing them on

the board ( underline

the key words )

- Ss to work out the

rules for themselves by

Situations which

require first

–

aid

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

1.1

1.2

II/
1.

2.

III/

bedtime .

=> Concept checking

- Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by

asking questions .

- After formulating the model sentences , elicit some

more phrases with the same use from students .

*

To make a request :

Would /can / could / Will + you (please) + V

…

?

*Reponses :

+ Sure / Ok / All right .

- I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not

* To make an offer

Will / Won

,

t you

Shall I / can I + V …..?

Can I

Would you like + to + V …...?

What can I do / get for you ?

Can I get you ………..?

*Responses

:

+ Yes , please . / That would be nice .

- No , thank you .

1.3 To make a promise

I promise I will / I will not ………..

I will ………... I promise .

I promise to …………...

*Reponses :

I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not forget

- Ask Ss to copy down .

* While - speaking :

+ Matching :

- Hang the chart with the statements on the board .

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match

the situations with the statements .

1. The girl has a burn on her hand .
2. The girl has a bad fever .

3. The boy has just broken the vase .
4. The boy has a headache .

5. The boy has a snake bite .

- Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c

*Picture Drill :

- Identify the situations in the pictures

Picture a) -> request

“ b) -> offer / request

“ c) -> offer / request

“ d) -> offer

“ e) -> promise

- Ask Ss to work in pairs

+ Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ?

Sure . Here you are

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in

front of class.

* Post - speaking :

Pair work ( closed pairs )

- Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges

- Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make

asking questions

T- Ss

- Pairs work

T – Ss

- T – Ss

- Pairs work

Ss to copy down

Ss to look at the

pictures ( page 82 )

and match the

situations with the

statements .

Whole class

Group work of 4 / 5 Ss

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

IV/

V/
VI/

sentences for themselves

- Collect their ideas and write them on the boards

* Suggested answers :

b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ?

B : Yes, please .

c. A : Can I get you some bandage ?

B : That would be nice

d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some

medicine / water ?

B : No , I am fine . Thank you .

e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house

again.

B : I hope so .

* Language focus 3 + 4 :

● Making requests , offers and promises with will 
Ex 3: Making requests , offers and promises with 
will :- Explain the aims of the exercise

- Ask Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to
complete the dialogue.

- Give feedback :

a. Will you open the window , please , Nga ?
b . will you give it to me , please ?

Ex 4 : Work with a partner 
- Explain the aims of the exercise
- Ask Ss to read the example aloud .

- Have Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or
promises

- Give feedback

b. Will you paint the door , please ?
I will paint the door tomorrow .
c . Will you study harder , please ?
I will study harder .

d. Will you carry the bag for me , please ?
Shall I carry the bag for you ?

e. Will you hang the washing , please ?
Shall I hang the washing for you ?
f. Will you cut the grass , please ?
I will cut the grass for you .

* Consolidation: - Retell the main points.

* Homework :

1. Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook )

2. Prepare the next lesson .

- Ss in turn to practice

all the exchanges.

- Ss to make sentences

for themselves.

- T – Ss

Pair work

-Some pairs to practice
in front of class .

- Ss to read all the words
in the box . Be sure Ss to
understand the meaning
of them and each

situation .

- Some pairs to read
their answers aloud .

- Retell the main

points.

- Listen and copy

down homeworks.

Unit 9 : A first aids course

Teaching date : 12 / 01 / 2009 .

Period 57.

Lesson 3

: Listen +language focus 3.

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to listen for

details about the activities talking place in an emergency room .

II. Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan.

posters,pictures and a chart.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I . Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99></div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

I/
1.
2.
II/
1.
2.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
III/

describing the actions of the people in it .

- Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the
winner .

- Give feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push , weight , 
wait , lie , stand , lean .

= > Lead in the new lesson

*Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and 
some new words

* Pre teach vocabulary :

- an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight

- a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not a
doctor nor a nurse

- a wheelchair ( using the picture )
-> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair )
- a stretcher ( picture )

- a crutch -> crutches ( picture )
-> Have Ss copy

* Checking technique : What and where 
* Matching :

- Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again and
match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in
the box .

- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .

- Give feedback

A -> ambulance D -> eye chart
B -> wheelchair E -> scale
C -> crutches F -> stretcher

●While listening– :
* Order Prediction

- Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words .

- Put the words in the table

Guess key
ambulance
wheelchair
crutches

eye chart
scale
stretcher
3
2
6
4
5
1
- Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words
- Play the tape and ash Ss to listen

- Ask Ss to give their answers and correct
*. True / False statements

- Stick the chart with the statements on the board :

+ A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room .
+ The patient,s head is bandaged

+ A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it .
+ The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different
size .

+ The baby,s mother is trying to stop the nurse from

weighing her baby .

- Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check if
they understand the meaning of the statements

- Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the
statements is true and which is false .

- Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times )
- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
1. False ( a parademic not a doctor )

2. True

3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient )
4. True

5 . False ( stop her baby from crying )

* Language focus 3 : Nga is helping her grandmother . 
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences . Use the

Ss the group having the
most right verbs is the
winner .

- Listen to and copy
down new lesson.
-Repeat in chorus.

T – Ss
Ss copy down.

- Ss to look at the picture

in their books again and
match the letter A,B
,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct
words in the box .

T- Ss / individual work
Ss are going to listen to
a paragraph about the
activities taking place in
an emergency room
which contains the
words on the board
Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
Ss copy and guess the
order of the words
Whole class

- Ss to read the

statements carefully and
check if they understand
the meaning of the
statements

- Ss work in pairs to
decide which of the
statements is true and
which is false .

- Ss to read their answers

and give feedback.
Individual

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

Unit 9 : A first aids course

Teaching date : 14 / 01 / 2009 .

Period 58.

lesson 4

: Read + language focus 1.

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to read for the

instructions about some more situations requiring first – aid . Ss will be able to know

how to use “ in order to , so as to .”

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan, chart , picture /

drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of

last lesson. And then T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

2.

II/

1.

2.

● Warm up : * Bingo

- Ask Ss to give nouns for emergencies which require
first – aid and write them on the board ( burn , cut , bee
sting , snake bite , fainting , shock , nose bleed )

- Have Ss choose 4 any 4 words on the board and write
them down on a piece of paper .

- call out the words until someone has ticked all the four
words and shouts “ Bingo “

* Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of reading
passage and some new words to Ss .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

-(to) lie flat : ( mime / drawing )
-(to) elevate = (to) lift > < (to) lower
- (a) victim : a person who needs first aid
- (to) overheat : make something too hot
- Tissue damage(n) : ton thuong mo
- (to) ease : lam de chiu, lam diu di

* Checking technique : Rub out and remember
* Network

- Draw the network with some examples on the board
- Ask Ss to think of what to do in these emergency cases
- Collect and write the students, ideas on the bard

* While – reading :

- Have Ss open their books and read the instructions
page 83

* Matching :

- Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match tree
Leadings A , B , C to them .

Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d
* Grid : - Draw the grid on the board .

- Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the
information .

- Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers

- Give feedback

Cases Do Don,t

Fainting

- Leave the patient lying flat .
- Elevate the patients, feet or 
lower his / her head .

- Do not force him / her
to sit or stand .

- Give him / her a cup of tea - Do not overheat the

Whole class

Ss choose 4 any 4 words
on the board and write
them down on a piece of
paper .

Individual

- `Have Ss copy down.
Repeat in chorus.

T – Ss

- Ss to think of what to
do in these emergency
cases.

Whole class

- Ss to go to the board
and add the missing
information .

Individual

- Ss to read the

instructions again and

Shock

Fainting

Fainting

Burns

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

III/

*

IV/
V/

Shock when he / she revives . victim with blankets or coat
- Do not give the victim

any food or drink or
drug .

Burns

- Cool the burn immediately
to minimize the tissue
damage .

- Put the affected part under a
running cold tap .

- Ease the pain with ice or
cold water packs .

- Cover the burned area with
a thick sterile dressing .

- Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks .
* Post – reading :

- Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how to
give first aid . And Call on some volunteers from each
group to demonstrate in front of class .

* Language focus 1: + Negative purposes :

* In order( not) to +V../ *So as (not) to +V..

Eg : You have to take your warm clothes with you in

order not to get bad cold.

* Matching : Ex 1.

- Ask Ss to read the example aloud and ask them to
match one part of a sentence from column A with
another part in column B

- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback

1- f , 2- c , 3- b , 4 – e , 5- a , 6- d
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Let Ss do the exercises 6,7 in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

fill the information .
- Some Ss to the board to
write their answers
Individual

Pair work

Group work .

- Some volunteers from

each group to

demonstrate in front of
class .

Ss to exchange their
answers to correct for
each other .

- Retell the main points
- Copy down

homeworks

Unit 9

A first aids course

Teaching date : 17 / 01 / 2009 .

Period 59.

lesson 5

: Write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how

to write a thank – you note .

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

***
I/
1.

* Warm up : Shark attack

( Revised words : lie flat , elevate , lower , victim , ease )
 Lead in the new lesson .

* Pre – writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss

*. Pre- teach vocabulary :

- disease (adj) mac benh , (n) benh cua co the .
- gloomy ( adj) toi tam , u am , am dam.

- Get on together : song hoa thuan voi ai.
-( to) thank Sb for sth

Eg : She thanked me for helping her

- (to )cheer Sb up = to make Sb feel happier : co vu, chia se

T- Ss
T- Ss
2.
3.
a.
b.
*
II/
III/
IV/

- (to come over ( translation )
+ (an ) Occasion : dip gi…
+ (to) contact : lien he, tiep xuc.
Have Ss copy

* Checking technique : slap the board 
*. Set the scene

- Ask Ss to close their books and listen “ Nga was sick and
she had to go to the hospital . After she left the hospital ,
she wrote a thank – you note to Hoa . Why and what did
she write ? “

*. True / False Predictions

- Hang the poster with the statements on the board

+. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some come candy .
+. Hoa,s gift cheered Nga up .

+ Nga ,d like Hoa to see her at the hospital .
+. Nga is very bored now .

+. Nga writes the letter at the hospital .
- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict .

- Get S to give their predictions and write them on the
board .

- Ask Ss to look at the letter and complete it with the right
verb forms .

- Monitor and help Ss with the tense forms .

- Call on some Ss to give their answers and give feedback .
- Ask Ss to read the whole letter and check if their

prediction are right or not .
* Answer key :

1. False -> flower ( not candy ) 2. True
3. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
4. True

5. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
* While – writing : Questions and answers

- Tell Ss they are going to write a thank – you note to a
friend and invite him / her to go on a picnic with them .
- Ask Ss to read the questions carefully to answer orally
- Have Ss practice speaking to each other .

- Monitor and correct .

- Get Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make it a
thank – you note .

- Tell Ss to write their letters in their exercise notebooks .
* Post – writing : Exhibition

- Divide the class into 4 groups and choose a letter
randomly in each group .

- Compare their letters and correct .

- Call on some more Ss to read their letters for class
- Give feedback and correct .

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main pointsof this lesson.

Whole class

S- Ss to close their books
and listen “ Nga was
sick and she had to go to

the hospital.

- Ss to read the

statements and predict
Individual

Individual

- Ss to read the whole
letter and check if their
prediction are right or
not .

T – Ss

- Ss to join the sentences
into a paragraph to make
it a thank – you note .
- Ss to write their letters
in their exercise

notebooks .
T – Ss
Groupwork

- Compare their letters
and correct

Individual

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

V/ * Homework :

1. Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter to
another friend for another occasion .

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

- Copy down
homeworks.

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 19/ 01 / 2009 .

Period 60 .

lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read.

( Bai soan theo powerpoint)

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they should do

to protect the environment and save natural resources . They will also be able to understand
the structure: S + to be + adj + that – clause.

- Developing Skills: listening, reading, speaking.

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6 flashcards , a
chart.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.
- Ask: Who’s absent to day?

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.
- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities

T

Students’ activities

1/ Warm up: getting started _ p.89
- Set the scene: Play the song 3R

+ What’s the title of the song?

Phân loại rac để làm gì? (Tái chế) đó là chủ
đề của bài học hôm nay và các em sẽ hiểu
rõ hơn 3R nghĩa là gì.

*Matching:

- Show 4 pictures.

- Explain the words: Use cloth bags, use

tree leaves to wrap things, make garbage into
fertilizer, make vegetable matter into animal
food…

5’

10’

- Listen to the song.

- Answer.

- Listen and repeat then
translate.

- Listen and repeat

- Listen and repeat
- Copy

- Match

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- Ask students to match the words with the
pictures.

- Ask students to work in pairs:
A: We should use ...
B: Yes, that ‘s right.

2. Preteach vocabulary ;
T: present new words

New words

-(to) recycle: tái chế (Situation)
-(to) reduce: giảm (Antonym)
-(to) reuse: tái sử dụng (Visual)
-(to) throw: ném (Visual)

-(to) contact: liên lạc (Translation)
-(to) overpackage: gói kỹ (Situation)

- Check by matching.

3./ Presentation the dialogue: Listen and

read P.89.

T: Set the scene: Miss Blake

A representative from Friends of the

Earth, Miss Blake, is talking to the students
of Quang Trung school. Friends of the
Earth shows people how to protect the
environment and save natural resources



True/False predictions
1. Friends of the Earth is an organization
to help people make friends with each
other.

2. Miss Blake asks the students to
remember 3 things: reduce, reuse, recycle.
3. We cannot reuse things like envelopes,
glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags.
4. Miss Blake says that we should use
cloth bags.

-ask sts to predict
-T gets feeback1..

-plays the tape and ask sts to check the
prediction.

-Getfeedback 2.

-call some group read aloud.
-show the questions.

* Comprehension questions

a, What does Miss Blake mean by reduce?
b, What things can we reuse?

c, What does recycle mean?

10’

- Listen

Sts: listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue.

Sts: practice the dialogue
( pairs)

-Read through the statements
-Predict True or False

-Listen and read the dialogue
Sts: listen to the tape check T or
F.

-read aloud.

-Read the dialogue for more
details amd find the answers

-Answer the question in pairs.

- Find the sentence from
the dialogue.

- Read in choral then
individual.

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

d, Where can we look for information on
recycling things?

Answer key:

a/ Reduce means not buying product which
are overpackaged

b/ We can reuse things like envelopes, glass,
plastic bottles and old plastic bags

c/ Recycle means not just throwing things
away. Try and find another use for them.
d/ We can look for information on recycle

things by having a contact with an
organization like Friends of the Earth,
going to the local library, or asking your
family and friends or scientific society.

. Give model sentences:

I am pleased that you want to know
more

- Have Sts read again in choral and
individual.

. Concept check:
- Meaning:

- Form: S + tobe + adj + that – clause.
- Use: Adj followed by a noun clause

. Practice

- Give the cues

|She / happy / I passed my exam.

| They / sure / he will come here.

| It / good / we reduce the garbage.

4. Consolidation (5’)
- Shows the picture: 3R

- Ask Sts to retell the meaning of 3 word: 3R

and the form.

5. Homework (5’)

- Learn by heart new words and form;

-

Write 3 sentences using the cues and the
new form.

10’

7’

3’

2’

- Make sentences from
the cues

Read aloud

- Work individually

Copy the form

- Practice in pairs

- Re tell the main points
of this lesson.

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 19/ 01 / 2009 .

Period 60 .

lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read.

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do

something to protect the environment and save natural resources .

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan ,6 flashcards , a chart.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

*Warm up : Brainstorming (Getting started) 
Reuse plastic bags

- Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of
garbage they produce .

- Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups
- Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish

and the team having the most good ideas is the winner .
- Give feedback

( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things , make
garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter into
animal food … )

 Lead in to new lesson .

Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .

* Pre – teach vocabulary :
- representative (n) = dai dien

- to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger .
-> to protect so / sth from so / sth

- natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral
deposits

- to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used
again .

- to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or
letter .

-> Have Ss copy .

* Checking technique : Jumbled words

- Stick 6 flashcards with jumbled words on the board

Group work of 4/5 teams
.

- Ss to think of ways to
reduce the amount of
garbage they produce .
- Ss to put the posters on
the board after they
finish and the team
having the most good
ideas is the winner .

- Copy down new
lesson.

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Ways to reduce the

amount of garbage

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

*
*
*

II/
1.

III/

- Ask Ss to rewrite the words in the right order .

- Tell Ss the first two groups with right words will get 2
points .

- Correct and give feedback

contact – representative – resource
natural – protect – recycle

*True / false predictions

- Set the scene “ A representative from Friends of the

Earth , Miss Blake , is talking to the students of Quang 
Trung School . Friends of the Earth shows people how to
protect the environment and save natural resources “

- Put the chart with the statements on the board .

1. Friends of the Earth is an organization to help

people make friends with each other .

2. Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3 things

: reduce , reuse , recycle .

3. Reduce means buying the products which are over

packed .

4. We can not reuse things like envelopes , glass ,

plastic bottles , old plastic bags .

5. Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and

should not use plastic bags at all .

6. Recycling means not just throwing things away

but trying and finding another use for them .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are
true or false .

- Call on some Ss to read their guesses and write them on
the board .

While – reading :
*. Checking predictions

- Ask Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue .

- Call on Ss to correct the false statements .
- Give feedback

1. False -> an organization to help people
2. True

3. False -> Reduce means not buying …
4. False -> We can reuse things …
5. True 6. True

* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs .
- Monitor and help Ss with their work

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions .

- Give feedback

a. Reduce means not buying products which are over 
packed .

b. We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic 
bottles and old plastic bags .

c. Recycle means not just throwing things away . Try and
find another use for them .

d. We can look for information on recycling things by

Whole class

Group work of 4/5 Ss
- Put the chart with the
statements on the board.

Ss to work in pairs to
decide if the statements
are true or false .

some Ss to read their
guesses and write them
on the board .

Teacher – Ss

Ss to look at the
questions and work in
pairs .

Pair work
Individual

Whole class

Ss to express their
opinions / ideas on this
topic

Pair work

tconatc

psentreretive

a

ceresoru

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

IV/
V/

having a contact with an organization like Friends of the
Earth , going to the local library or asking your family 
and friends .

e. We should not use plastic bags because when we 
throw them away , they could stay very long and could 
not be self- destroyed .

* Post – reading : * Discussion

How to protect our environment ?

“ ”

- Ask Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic .
- Write their ideas on the board into a list

- Give feedback , correct and hove them copy .
* Consolidation:

-Retell the main points of this lesson.
*Homework :

1. Write the questions and full answers in your exercise
notebook .

2. Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook .

Individual

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 02 /02 /2009.

Period 61

lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson ,

Ss will be able to practice giving and
responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost .

- Develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have

just seen from memory .

=> T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

I/
1.

*Warm up : Kim,s game

* Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers ,
books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic
bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter ,
clothes , shoes , school bags …

* Speak

* / Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking 
and some new words to students .

* Pre-teach vocabulary :

- Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make their
plants or trees grow well .

-> to fertilize

- Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made
from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ?

Whole class
Team work

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

II/
***

*
*

III/
***

IV/

-> compost heap
- Fabric (n) = material

- Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ?
+ Have Ss copy in their notebooks .

 Checking technique : Bingo 
*Dictation list :

- Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items
and put them into the right groups .

- Draw the table on the words and put them in the right
columns .

- Model some words .

- Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up
- After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give their
answers .

- Read the words again and correct

Group Items

Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes
Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars )

Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles )
Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ..)
Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material )
Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags )
Vegetable

matter Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits )

*While – speaking :
Mapped dialogue :

- Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board .
- Elicit the exchanges from students

- Have some pairs practice each exchange before going
on to another exchange .

- After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue .

a. Open pairs :

- Ask some pairs to practice in front of class .
b. Closed pairs :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with
the words in the dictation list

- Monitor and correct .

A B

Which group ( do clothes )
belong to ?

What can we do with
( those clothes ) ?

Is / are ( fruit vegetable
matter ) ?

What will we do with
(it ) ?

Put ( them ) in fabric
We can ( recycle them and
make them into paper or
shopping bags .

That is right

We make ( it into compose
and fertilizer our field . )

 Post speaking :

*Listening

Multiple choice :

- Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives
the instructions to make compost .

- Ask Ss to open their books and read the multiple
choice questions

- Have them guess the answers

- Turn on the tape 2 or 3 times , Ss listen and do the
exercise .

- Get Ss to give their answers and correct
Answers : a. A b. B c. A d. B

- Have them copy
* Consolidation:

Individual

Individual
Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .

some pairs practice each
exchange before going
on to another exchange .

Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
replacing the

information with the
words in the dictation
list

Pair work

Ss to open their books
and read the multiple
choice questions

Individual

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

V/ - Retell the main points of this lesson.*Home work :

1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the information .
2. Do the exercises in the work book.

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 04/02 /2009.

Period 62.

lesson 3: Read

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in the 
Present Simple

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . 
pictures , drawing .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.
II. Checking up :

- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.
-T corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

I/
1.

**
2.

II/
1.

N B C G A R B A G E R

V E D R D O P P U R E

E J U E Y I L A R S C

L U S E D P A P E R Y

O S T N O T S E D E C

P R O T E C T R U U L

E A B R C A I B C S E

R E C E E N C A E E K

D E E E F G H G I J L

- Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there are
12 hidden words .

- Divide the class into 4 groups .

- Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper and
hand in when they finish

- Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the
winner .

Answer key :

environment , garbage , pure , used
paper , protect .
envelope , dust , green tree , can ,
plastic , paper bag ,
reduce , reuse , recycle
* Pre – reading :Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- tire (n) : using picture
- pipe (n) : using drawing

- deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan
- to refill = to fill something empty again
- to melt >< to freeze

- Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember 
*Open prediction

- Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a newspaper
giving some recycling facts to protect the environment .
- Ask them to look at the board and guess what they are
going to read .

+ What do people do with used things ?
+ What can they make from them ?

- Call on some Ss to read their guesses on the board
Car ties -> …………..

Milk bottles ->………
Glass -> …………..
Drink cans -> …………..

Household and garden waste -> ……… ….
* While – reading :

1. Grid

- Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it
- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of recycling facts
mentioned in the text .

- Call on some Ss to write the information in the grid on
the board .

Answer Key :

Used things Recycling Facts
Car tires

Milk bottles
Glass

Drink cans
Household and
garden waste

are recycled to make pipes and
floor recoverings

are cleaned and refilled
(with milk )

is broken up , melted and made
into new glassware

are brought back for recycling
is made into compost .

* Comprehension questions

Ss the topic about the
environment and there
are 12 hidden words .
Group work of 4 teams
Ss to write their answers
on a piece of paper and
hand in when they finish
Ss the group with the
most right words is the
winner .

T – Ss

Whole class

Individual

Whole class
Pair work

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 06/02/2009.

Period 63

lesson 4 : Write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson ,

Ss will be able to write a set of
instructions, using the sequencing .

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.

drawing,
mime , picture

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

***

I/
1.

2.

**

II/

**

III/

1. Lucky number

2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak
English everywhere “

3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are liked
by most children “

4. Lucky number
5. Lucky number

6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do not use
things carefully . “

7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are candies liked
by the children ? “

8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han teaches
Maths . “

9. Say this sentence in the passive “ Vegetables do not
eat meat . “

- Divide the class into 2 teams .

* Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to Ss

1. Pre-teach vocabulary :

- to soak : put sth in liquid for a time so that it
becomes completely wet .

- to mash : mime

- wire mesh (n) : luoi dien
- bucket (n) : drawing
-> Have Ss copy down .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board 
*. Ordering prediction :

- Set the scene : tell Ss they are going to read a text
about how to recycle used paper .

- Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow chart
- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict the order of the
actions

soak dry pull out mix press mash 
1………. 2 ………. 3 ……..
4 ……… 5 ………. 6 …………

- Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on the
board .

- Explain the process of recycling , using mimes or
Vietnamese and correct .

- Feedback

1. soak 2. mash 3. mix. 4. pull out 5. press 6. dry
III / While – writing :

- Ask Ss to open their books , read the text and fill in
the verbs

- Monitor and correct the exercise in the text book .
- Feedback

1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press. 5.wrap 6. wait 7. dry
* Recall

- Ask Ss to close their books

- Call on Ss to say the sentences from memory .

- Get Ss to write the text in brief using the sequencing
- Monitor and help Ss with their work .

- Feedback

First , soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight .

Then , mash the paper by a wooden spoon .

Next , mix the mashed paper with water . After that , 
use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out , put it on the 
cloth and press it down firmly .

Finally , take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the 
sun .

IV / Post – writing : Ordering pictures 
- Stick the pictures on the board randomly
- Read the instructions aloud

a. First take the used tealeaves from the tea pot .

Team work

Listen and copy

Teacher – Ss
Team work

Teacher

Group work of 4/ 5 Ss
Individual

Individual

Group work

Ss to say the sentences
from memory .

- Write the sequencing
on the board and have
Ss to practice speaking
first

Individual

Ss to write the text in
brief using the

sequencing

- some Ss to read their
writing for the class .

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

Unit 10: Recycling

Teaching date : 09/02 /2009.

Period 64 .

Lesson 6 : Language focus

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in

Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes ,

4 cardboards .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of

last lesson. And then T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

Ex 1:

2.
Ex 3:

* Warm up : Questions game

- Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a
job name .

- Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking yes-no
questions

- The chosen student can only answer yes or no

- Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point
and take the place of the last chosen student .

Example questions :

- Do you get a big salary ?
- Do you wear uniform ?

* Language focus

* The passive forms

1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple
S + am / is / are + past participle

=> It is used when the subject is affected by the action of
the verb .

*Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :

+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to
put them in the correct order according to the instructions
+ Call on some groups to give their answers .

+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6

- Writing :

+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the
board and write their sentences

+ Correct and give feedback

1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple

S + will / shall + be + past participle
- Have Ss copy down

- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the
gaps , using the Passive

- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown

2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished …. 4.
Will … be made … ?

*. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause 
2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive

Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
*Complete the sentences

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Pair work

Teacher – Ss

Individual

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

Ex 4:

II/

III/
IV/

- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct

2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause

Example : We are delighted that you passed the English
exam .

- Get Ss to copy .
*Complete the letter

- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .

A B Key

1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)

a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom

1.d
2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary

- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the
words in the box

- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct.

* Exercises:
0. are delighted
1. was happy
2. am relieved

3. is afraid
4. Are … sure …
5. am certain

- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents
are delighted that he passed his English exam ……”

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Whole class

Individual

Read the letter aloud
Listen and copy

Teaching date : 12/ 02 / 2009.

Period 65 .

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson,

Ss will be able to form the passive voice in
Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives .

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unite 10.

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***
I/
1.

* GRAMMAR:

* The passive forms :

* Passive Form in the present Simple:

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

Ex 1:

2.
Ex 3:

II/

Ex 4:

- It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the
verb .

- How to change an active sentence to a passive voice :
Active S V O

Passive S + be + PII by O
eg : I love you

You are loved by me
Have Ss copy

*Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :

+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to
put them in the correct order according to the instructions

+ Call on some groups to give their answers .

+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6 
* Writing :

+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the
board and write their sentences

+ Correct and give feedback

1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple

S + will / shall + be + past participle
- Have Ss copy down

- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the
gaps , using the Passive

- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown / 2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished … 4. Will … be made … ?

*. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause 
2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive

Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
*Complete the sentences

- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct

|Give model sentences:

I am pleased that you want to know more

- Have Sts read again in choral and individual.
. Concept check:Meaning / Use / form…

- Form: S + tobe + adj + that – clause.
- Use: Adj followed by a noun clause
|She / happy / I passed my exam.

| They / sure / he will come here.

| It / good / we reduce the garbage.

2.2 .(S + be + adj + that / noun clause )

Example : We are delighted that you passed the English
exam .

- Get Ss to copy .
*Complete the letter

- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .

A B Key

1. relieved (a) a. xin chuc mung 1.d

Teacher – Ss
Work with a partner
Pair work

- Ss to read the

instructions and look at
the pictures to put them
in the correct order
according to

theinstructions
- Ss to rewrite the
sentences in the passive
form

Pair work

Teacher – Ss

Individual

Whole class

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Whole class

Ss to read the letter and
match the words

Individual

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

III/
IV/

2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)

b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom

2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary

- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the
words in the box

- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct.

- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents
are delighted that he passed his English exam ……”

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

Listen and copy
ss to work in pairs to
complete the letter using
the words in the box
- Retell the main points
of this lesson.

- Copy down
homeworks.

Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Teaching date : 12/ 02 /2009.

Period 66 .

lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read.

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some expressions to 
express their interest

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.
- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson: 
***

I/

II/
1.

* Warm up : Jumbled words

- Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board

Ha long bay Nha Rong harbor

- Ask each team to connect the words to make the right
phrases for places of interest and write them on the board
as fast as possible

=> Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature
, Nha rong Harbor .

* Getting Started :

- Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with the
pictures

- Call on some Ss to give their answers
a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor
c. The Temple Literature

d. Ha Long Bay

- Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud .
* Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 
reading and some new words to students .

*. Pre- teach Vocabulary :

- Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is
grown in one season .

- Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar )
- Water buffalo (n) : con trau

Team work

Watch EL TV

Individual

Listen and copy
Teacher – Ss

individual and choral

Places of interest

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

III/

IV/

V./
VI/

- forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes
Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N

Ex : a3 – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old – boy

* Checking vocabulary : Bingo 
+. Guiding questions :

- Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the
board

a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ?

b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam?
c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ?

d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ?
e. What would Tim like to do ?

- Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes
- Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to give their answers

- Feedback :

a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport
b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi

d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn
and sugar cane fields

e. He would like to take a photo .

* While – reading :

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False

- Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to answer ,
then have them correct the false sentences and get them to
write in their notebooks .

a. T b. T d. T e . T
c. F -> … in a taxi

f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are
grown around Ha Noi .

- Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in
front of class

- Correct their pronunciation

* Post – reading : Discussion

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them
and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the
situations mentioned below .

* to express interest :

- I,d like you to meet my parents ….
- It is nice to meet you ….

- It is great to be in Viet Nam .
- I would to sit with Tim …..
* to express a request :

- Would you mind sitting in the front seat …
- Would you mind if I took a photo ?

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
*/ Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give
some examples .

2. Do the exercises in the workbooks .

Whole class
Individual
Pair work

Ss to think about the
questions in a few
minutes

Ss listen to the tape
while reading the
dialogue

Ss to work in pairs to
answer the questions

Whole class

Ss to listen to the tape
and say out True or
False

some groups of five to
practice the dialogue
in front of class

Individual

Ss to read the dialogue
again , discuss with
them and ask them to
pick out the sentences
containing the

situations mentioned
below .

Individual

- Retell the main
points of this lesson.
- copy down

homeworks.

Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Teaching date : 13 / 02 /2009.

Period 67 .

Lesson 2 : speak

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

I. Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to formal
requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions .

- Develop Ss’ speaking skills.

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD,

a mapped
dialogue chart ..

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up : - Asks Ss go to the board to write the names of the things they have

just seen from memory .

=> T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

I/

1.

***

2.

II/

* Warm up : What does it say ?

- Choose a student and ask him / her to go to the front of
the class with his / her back to the board so that he / she
can not see what is written on the board .

- Write the information on the board .

- Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess
what is written on the board by asking questions until he /
she says out right the words on the board .

Example : Yes, I do .

Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ?
Or Every day

Ss ask : How often do you have a shower ?

* Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and

some structures

1. Pre- teach structures :
- Set the scene :

Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Jones
and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit
the sentences from Ss .

Model sentences :

1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi?
B : No problem .

2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ?
B : Not at all .

=> Used to make and respond to formal requests
Form :

1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …?
2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple) …? 
 Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple ) ..? 
Responses :

 Agreement:

No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at all . /
Please do . / Please go head .

 Disagreement :

I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible
I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . 
- Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with
suggested words

2. Cardboard Drill :

1. move your car ? (v ) / 2. go out with me ? ( x)

3. wait for me ? (x) / 4. Get / coffee ? (v) / 5. Smoke ? (x)
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .

*/ While – speaking :
- Ask Ss to work in pairs

+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the
exchanges

+ Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the
exchanges

Whole class

Teacher – Ss
Ss of the exchanges
between Hoa and Mr.
Jones and between
Hoa and Tim in the

last dialogue and elicit
the sentences from Ss .

Ss to copy and give
some more examples
with suggested words

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

***

III/

IV/
V/

- Give feedback

Mapped dialogue

You Tourist officer

Excuse me !

I would like to visit a
market. Would you
mind suggesting one ?
That sounds

interesting . Thank
you .

Yes ?

Not at all .

How about goping to Thai
Binh Market ?

It opens from about
5 am to pm .

You are welcome .

+ Open pairs: Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue.
+ Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the
information / 101 to practice other dialogues .

Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums
Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps
Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden
* Post – speaking :

- Call on some volunteers from each group to practice in
front of class .

- Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books
* Consolidation:

-Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Do the exercises in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Ss to work in pairs

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Pair work

some volunteers from
each group to practice
in front of class .

-Retell the main points
of this lesson.

Individual

Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Teaching date : 19 / 02 /2009.

Period 68 .

lesson 3 : Listen + language focus 1, 2.

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen and match the places

in the box to their correct positions on the map . Ss will be able to use Present and Past
participles to describe things and people

II. Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan.

posters,pictures and a chart.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I . Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

Two Ss go to the board to make the similar dialogue about to send a letter or parcel.

- T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

a)
1.
2.

* Warm up : Quiz what is this place ?

- Ask questions and call the student who puts his / her
hand up first to answer

- Tell Ss each place consists of 3 questions ; 3 points for
the first question , 2 points for the second question , 1
point for the third question .

a. What is this place ?

1. it is called the city of Eternal Spring .

Individual

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

3.
b)
c)
d)
*
I/
1.
2.
II/
***
III/
IV/
1.

2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes .

3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here .

b. What is this place ?

1. It is a seaside resort .

2. It has a very big monument of Buddha .
3. It has an Oceanic Institute

c. What is this place ?

1. It is a mountainous resort .
2. It has tribal villages .
3. Sometimes it has snow .

d. What is this place ?

1. It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESSCO.
2. It has a lot of caves .

3. It contains of a lot of islands .
*Key :

a. Da Lat b. Nha Trang c. Sa Pa d. Ha Long Bay
=> Lead in the new lesson .

* Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and 
some new words

+. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- Highway ( n)

- Tourist information center (n)

+. Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around Ha
Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in
the maps . Listen to them and match the places to the
correct positions on the maps “

- Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them
on the board.

* While – listening :

- Ask Ss to list the places on the maps .
- Play the tape 2 or 3 times

- Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the
correct answers

Answer key :

a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station
d) pagoda e) temple

- Play the tape once more to check the answers
( pause at some important paragraph )

* Post – listening :

- Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape .

- Correct their pronunciation

* Language focus 1+2:

1. Language focus 1 :

- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108
and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at
Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they
doing ? “

- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?

Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?

Ss : She is carrying a bag .
……

 Model sentences :

The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang 
( present participle phrase )

points for the first
question , 2 points for
the second question , 1
point for the third
question .

Individual

Ss guess their correct
positions on the map
Ss to read their
predictions and write
them on the board.
Teacher – Ss
Whole class
Work in group
Individual

Pair work
Individual

Ss to open their books
and look at the

picture / 108 and set
the scene “ It is time
for recess and the
people at Quang Trung
school are in the
school yard . What are
they doing ? “

Whole class

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

2

V/
VI/

Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle

Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with active meaning

- Have Ss copy
* Practice :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using
the information above

Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang 
- Correct and feedback

2. Language focus 2 : 
* Matching

- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the

picture / 109 to do the matching

A B Key

1. box
2. truck
3. lamp
4. doll

5. flowers
6. toys

a. wrap in
b. dress in
c. recycled from
d. keep in

e. made in
f. paint
1. f
2. c
3. e
4. b
5. a
6. d
- Ask Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer the
questions :

- Where is the old lamp made in ?
- What color is the box painted ?
- What is truck recycled from ?
- What color is the doll dressed in ?
- What are the flowers wrapped in ?
- Where are the toys kept ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions

=> Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ?

Model Sentences :

The old lamp made in China is five dollars . 
( past participle phrase )

Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle
Irregular verb

Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with passive meaning .

- Have Ss copy
* Practice :

- Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and
answer

* T : How much is the box painted green ?
St: The box painted green is one dollar

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the
questions ( Using the information in the matching )
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class .
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points.
* Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

picture / 108 and set
the scene “ It is time
for recess and the
people at Quang Trung
school are in the
school yard . What are
they doing ?

Ss to look at the words
in the box and the
picture / 109 to do the
matching

Ss to look at the
picture / 109 again and
answer the questions :

some pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions

Ss to look at their
books , listen to the
questions and answer
Ss to work in pairs ,
asking and answering
the questions ( Using
the information in the
matching )

- Call on some pairs to
demonstrate for the
class .

Retell the main points
of this lesson.

Individual

Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Teaching date : 20/ 02 /2009.

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

lesson 4 : Read .

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get the information from 
simple tourist advertisements .

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart . 
pictures , drawing .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.
II. Checking up :

- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson.
-T corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

I/
*.
II/
1.
**
2.
**
III/

A D D Y R E S O R T

D C A T G B E A C H

K N L R Y S A P A E

B U A I M K S A P C

A H T B V B I P J I

C A V E S L D K I T

H L N L A K E C T A

M O U N T A I N R D

A N H A T R A N G E

A G G E F G X C U L

*Answer Key :

resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes
mountains , Nha Trang

Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe
Seaside , The citadel

*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading
and some new words to students .

+ Pre – teach vocabulary :

- accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in
- giant (adj ) = huge / very big

- slope (n)

- jungle (n) = a very thick forest
- limestone (n) = da voi

- florist (n) : a person who sells flowers
- to import >< to export

+ Checking vocabulary : What and where 
*/ While – reading :

* Grid :

- Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts and
check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid

- Call on some Ss to give their answers
Answer Key :

+ Nha Trang : Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , local 
transport , tourist attractions .

+ Da Lat : Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist 
attractions

+ Sa Pa : Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist 
attractions , villages .

+ Ha Long Bay : World Heritage , tourist attractions , 
sand beaches , railways , hotels , caves , locals transport .
- Have Ss copy down

*. Matching :

- put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the

words or phrases in Column A to column B

A B

1. Nha Trang
2. Da lat
3. Sa Pa

4. Ha long Bay
5. Nha Rong
Harbor

a. tribal villages , mountain climbing
b. The place where President Ho Chi
Minh left Viet Nam in 1911.

c. Swimming and sunbathing .
d. Oceanic Institute

e. Flower gardens .

- Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect
the words

Answer Key : 1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b 
+. Grid

- Get Ss to open their books , read the text on page 105
and check (v) the boxes .

- Monitor and correct .

*/ Post – reading : Role play

- Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the information
in the text .

+ Write the model on the board .

A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ?
B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) .
A : Why ?

B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes mountain –

Team work

Ss to find 13 hidden
words and write them
on a piece of paper .

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Individual
Pair work
Ss to read the

advertisements about
the resorts and check
(v) the topics

mentioned in the grid
Ss to work in pairs to
compare their answer
Whole class

Individual

Ss to open their books ,
read the text on page
105 and check (v) the
boxes .

Ss to ask and answer
questions using the
information in the text.
Individual

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Teaching date : 20 / 02 / 2009.

Period70 .

Lesson 5: write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a
narrative , using a guided composition .

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.

drawing,

mime , picture, gap fill charts.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

2.

II./
1.

2.

* Warm up : Which word ?

( Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill )

- Put the missing words on the board and have Ss study
first :written – climax – attention – brief – events

- Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the
words in the box .

- Ask Ss of each group to go to the board and write the
words as fast as possible .

- Explain the definition in Vietnamese
Answer key :

1. events 2. written 3. climax 4. attention 5. brief
* Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and 
some new words to Ss .

1. Pre – teach Vocabulary
- canoe (n) : using picture

- to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n)
- to hire : thue muon

- to overturn : lat up / lat do

- to rescue = to save somebody ,s life from danger 
+ Get Ss to copy down .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board

*. Ordering statements : Setting the scene Last week , “

while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family had quite 
an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake . What

did they do and what happened to them ? “

- Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and
rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story .
- Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and
correct pronunciation errors .

- Give feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e
*While – writing :

1. Explanation :

- Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess the
meaning of the new words .

- Explain the meanings of these words

+ to stumble : truot chan / + to go off : vang ra
+ to realize : nhan ra

- Get Ss to copy

2. Ordering pictures :Ask Ss to look at the pictures again
and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order
to make it a story.

Group work of 4/5 Ss
Ss of each group to go
to the board and write
the words as fast as

possible .

Teacher – Ss
Whole class
Teacher – Ss
some pairs to give
their answers and
correct .

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

3.

III/

IV/
V/

- Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct .
- Give feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g 
3. Write – it – up :

- Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the
given words to write the story about Uyen .

- Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while they
are writing .

* Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a
narrative .

- Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for each
other .

- Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class
- Give feedback :

Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had a

math exam on Friday but she got up late . She realized 
her alarm clock did not go off . As he was leaving home , 
it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried to run as fast as she 
could . Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto
the road . Her school bag went into a pool of water and 
everything got wet . Strangely , the rain stopped as she got
to her classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to 
finish her exam .

* Post – writing :

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story in
front of class .

- Copy the story in their notebooks .

* Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their
notebooks .

2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class in
the next lesson .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Pair work
Ss to look at the
pictures again and
rearrange the events in
the correct

chronological order to
make it a story

Teacher – Ss
Whole – class
Individual
Individual

Ss to demonstrate the
completed story in
front of class .
Individual

Retell the main points
of this lesson.

Individual
Individual

Teaching date : 26 /02 / 2009.

Period 71 .

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present and Past

participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..?
and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 11.

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

I/
1.

2/
***

seconds and close their books .

- Tell them the team having the most right words is the
winner .

Answer Key :

box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit
*Language focus

+. Language focus 1 :
* Pre-teach :

- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108
and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at
Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they
doing ? “

- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?

Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?

Ss : She is carrying a bag .
T : ( Nam )

Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss Lien )
T : ( Ba )

Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book )
T : ( Lan )

Ss : ( standing by the table )
T : ( Nga and Hoa )

Ss : ( playing chess )
 Model sentences :

The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang 
( present participle phrase )

Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle

Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with active meaning

- Have Ss copy
* Practice :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using
the information above

Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang

- Correct and feedback

2. Language focus 2 :

* Pre –teach : Matching

- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the

picture / 109 to do the matching

A B Key

1. box
2. truck
3. lamp
4. doll
5. flowers
6. toys

a. wrap in
b. dress in
c. recycled from
d. keep in

e. made in
f. paint

1. f
2. c
3. e
4. b

5. a
6. d
- Where is the old lamp made in ?

- What color is the box painted ?
- What is truck recycled from ?
- What color is the doll dressed in ?
- What are the flowers wrapped in ?
- Where are the toys kept ?

=> Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ?
Model Sentences :

The old lamp made in China is five dollars . 
( past participle phrase )

Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle
Irregular verb

Team work

Ss open their books
again , go through the
words and correct .

Ss to answer then
correct

Whole class
Teacher – Ss

Choral -> individual

Ss to work in pairs to
say who each person is
, using the information
above .

Whole class

Individual

Pair work
Ss to look at the
picture / 109 again and
answer the questions :

some pairs to practice
asking and answering
the questions

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Testing date: 27/ 2 / 2009 .

Period 72.

Test( no 3 )

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge

they have learnt form unit 9 to unit 11 so that they can supplement what

they are short of . (to do the test well ).

II. Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

II. Checking up:

III. Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson .

- Deliver the test papers to Ss .

I / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps)

1. Would you mind if I ( take )

………

a photo ?

2. Would you mind ( help )

………

her to finish her homework ?

3. Do you mind if we ( get )

………

. a taxi to town ?

4. The cars ( make )

………

from Japan are the best .

5. The man ( talk )

………

to your teacher is my uncle .

II / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps )

1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind

………

?

2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind

………

.?

3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge

………

.

4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ………

III / Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps )

1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus .

2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English .

3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle .

4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city

center .

IV / Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases : ( 1,5

ps )

1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience.

2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park .

3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry .

V / Listen .You are going to listen to Lily talking about her self . You

are going to listen twice . Check (v) the correct box for True or False

( 2,0 Ps )

Statements

True False

1 Lily comes from China

2 English is important to her as she will need it for her

future job

3 She started learning English when she was eighteen .

4 She has a problem with listening .

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

7 She wants to be an English teacher .

8 She loves English songs , but she does not hope to

become a singer .

Tapescrift :

Hi ! my name is Lily . I come from China . I am a student , a

university student . I am eighteen years old . I am studying English as a

foreign language . English is important to me because I will need ot for my

job in the future . I began learning English when I was very young – at the

age of eight . I think that my biggest problem is listening . People speak very

quickly , so I can not understand them . English is really hard for me to

learn , but I like it . I want to be an English teacher ; or I hope to become a

singer one day because I love English songs very much .

The end

Teaching date : 27 / 2 / 2009.

period 72 :

TEST

(45min)

ENGLISH 8 (No 3)

I.)Circle the best answer: (3ps).

1.I open my book in

………

.. to read.

a) as b)order c)so.

2.You should cool the burn

………

..

a)immediately b)immediate c)immediating.

3.What time

………

. Lan be here.?

a)is b)shall c)will.

4. She will be here

………

three hours.

a)for b)in c)on.

5. Do you want to listen

………

.. the radio.?

a)at b)to c)for.

6. Thank you very much for the commics you

………

..me last week.

a)send b)sending c)sent .

II.)Choose one of two options to complete the following sentences : (3ps)

1.The glasses ( breaking / broken )last night are mine.

2. I ( glad /am glad )that you want to know more about the subject .

3. Would you mine if I ( turn on / turned on ) the T.V ?

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

III / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2 ps)

1. Would you mind ( help )

………

her to finish her homework ?

2. Do you mind if we ( get )

………

. a taxi to town ?

3. The cars ( make )

………

from Japan are the best .

4. The man ( talk )

………

to your teacher is my uncle .

IV / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps )

1. The children eat all the vegetables and meat .

=> All the vegetable ………

2.He will build a new house there.=>

A new house ………

* The end

Chữ kí giáo viên Chữ kí phụ huynh hs

………. ………..

Unit 12

A Vacation abroad

Teaching date : 28 / 2 / 2009.

Period 73.

Lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of

how to make accept and decline invitations .

II . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan , Pictures , chart ( true / false )

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

1.

2.

I.
1.

* Warm up :

+. Guessing game ( Getting started )

- Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to

guess what country it is .

- Feedback :

a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand

d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan

+. Chatting :

T :Where do you want to visit among these countries?

Ss:

………

..

T : Why ?

Ss : ………

*Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage

reading and some new words .

Individual

Ss to guess what

country it is .

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

*
2.

II/
1.

2.

+. Pre – teach Vocabulary :

- to include : bao gom , gom co

- to come over : to come to Someone

s house to visit

for a short time

- to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to

drive him / her to a place

- abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country

-> to be / go / travel / live abroad

* Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember

+. True / False Prediction

- Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a

vacation . She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to

tell her about the trip . “

- Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the

statements

a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in

San Francisco .

b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to

stay with her while they are in town .

c. Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith

s invitation

because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of

hers .

d. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for

3 days .

e. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs

Smith

s place for dinner one night .

f. Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen

s husband , goes abroad for

a business meeting .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements

are true or false .

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write

them on the board .

* While

–

reading

+. Checking predictions :

- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while

reading the dialogue .

- Call on some Ss to correct the false statements .

1. False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha

Noi

2. True

3. False ->

…

because her accommodation is included

in her tickets price .

4. True

5. False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs

Smith

s .

6. True

+. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen

s schedule

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs

to complete the grid with the information taken from

the dialogue .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the

information in the grid on the board .

Date

Mon 25

Tue 26

Wed 27

Thu 28

Schedule coming

to San

Francisco

Going

out

Having

dinner

with the

Leaving

San

Francisco

Teacher – Ss

Whole class

Teacher

- Ss to work in pairs

to decide if the

statements are true or

false .

- Some Ss to read

their predictions and

write them on the

board .

Pair work

Teacher – Ss

Individual

Whole class

Pair work

- Ss to read the

dialogue again and

work in pairs to

complete the grid

with the information

taken from the

dialogue .

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

3.

III/

+

+
+
+

IV/
V/

Smiths

- Have Ss copy

+. Comprehension Questions

- Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the

questions .

- Let Ss compare their answers with their partner.

- Call on some Ss to answer

- Give feedback and correct

Answer key :

a) No , they won

t . Because they are coming on a tour

, and their accommodation is included in the ticket

price , so they will stay at the hotel .

b) No , he won

t . Because he will have a business

meeting in the evening that day .

c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel .

- Get Ss to copy .

*/ Post

–

reading

:



Grammar Awareness

- Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the

statements indicating the following situations

1. Making an invitation

2. Accepting an invitation

3. Declining an invitation

4. Making a complaint

- Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy .

1. Would you like to come and stay with us

…

?

.. you must come over for dinner one night .

2. Ye , we

d love to but we will only be in town for

three nights .

3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a

tour ..

4. Oh . dear . He is always working.

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

* Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give

some more examples .

2. Do the exercises in the workbook

3. Prepare the next lesson .

- Ss to look at their

books and answer the

questions

- Individual

- Ss compare their

answers with their

partner

- Pair work

- Ss to read the

dialogue again and

pick out the

statements indicating

the following

situations

Whole class

Pair work

Ss to give their

answers and have Ss

copy .

- Retell the main

points of this lesson.

Copy down

homeworks.

- Work Individual

TUAN GIAO AN CHAO MUNG NGAY

8 THANG 3

Unit 12

A Vacation abroad

Teaching date : 2 / 3 / 2009.

Period 73.

Lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of

how to make accept and decline invitations .(

- Introducing the way to make an

invitation and how to accept or refuse it.)

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan , Pictures , chart ( true / false )

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss match the names of the countries

in the box with appropriate

pictures/flags

-Ss discuss : Which country do you

want to visit? Why ?

2.Presentation:

- Preteach vocabulary

- Checking vocab

-T sets the scene

- Student listen to the dialoge then

complete Mrs.Quyen’s

schedule(Listen and read 1 P.113)

- Students answer the questions

- Model sentences

3.Practice:

- Work in pairs : use given words to

make invitations ad respond

*Getting started :

a. The U.S.A ( The statue of Liberty)

b. Australia (The Opera House)

c. Thailand (The Pagoda and Buddha)

d. Britain (National flag)

e. Canada

f. Japan

I. Vocabulary :

Include (v) Bao gåm

Pick sb up (v) §ãn ai..

Abroad (adv) Níc ngoµi

A schedule (n) KÕ ho¹ch

* Rub out and remember :

* Dialogue : P.112

* Complete mrs. Quyen’s schedule :

Schedule Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thur 28

Coming
to San
Francisco

Going
out

Having
dinner
with
the
Smiths

Leaving
San
Francisco

* Listen and read 2 P.113 :

a. No, they won’t because they are coming

on a tour, and their accommodation is

included in the ticket price, so they will stay

at the hotel

b. No, he won’t because he will have a

business meeting in the evening that day

c. Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel

* Making invitation :

Invitation:Would you like to come and stay

with us?

Acceptance: Yes, we’d love to/ Thank you.

That would be very nice

Refusal

: That’s very kind of you, but we are

coming on a tour/ Sorry, I’m afraid I’m not

free

II. Practice :

*Word cue drill:

a. Go to the movie

b. come over for dinner

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

4.Production:

- Ss work in pairs, S1 acts as Mrs.

Quyen , to make a mini dialogue.

5. CONSOLIDATION:

- Retell the main points

6.Homeworks:

- Give tasks

d. have lunch with us

e. go for a walk

Example exchange :

S1: Would you like to go to the movie ?

S2:

Thank you very much. That would be very nice



Role – play :



Retell the main points of this lesson.

Homework :

-Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Unit 12 :a vacation AbRoad

Teaching date 6 / 3 / 2009.

Period 74.

Lesson 2 : speak + listen

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about

their plans for a trip abroad .

- Practice speaking about traveling plans using tourist brochures and flight

information.

- Listening to the weather reports for specific information.

II . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan , Pictures , chart ( true / false )

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

Cloudy, cool. cold, warm, hot, dry, fine,

humid, rainy, snowy, sunny, windy,

stormy, degree, minus, centigrade

[* Warm up : Quiz

- Tell the student who can answer the question
will get 1 or 2 good marks .

1.What is the end of everything ?
(letterg)

2. What word starts with T , ends with T , and
is full of T ? ( Teapot ; Pot -> full of

3. What is the middle of New York City ?

* Chatting :

Which country do you want to visit ?

Where will you stay ?

How do you travel ?

sunny

* Brainstorm :

cold

Cloudy

snowy

Weather

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

( York )

4. Which river in America has 4 eyes ?
( Mississippi ) ]

2.Pre- stages :

- Students read the flight information,

advertisement then answer the

questions to get information

- Sts guess the temperature of the 6

cities in the table

3.while- stages :

- Students listen to the tape then check

their predictions

- Students listen to the tape again then

fill in the table

- Sts use the the information to make

the dialogues

- Give feedback

4.Post – stages :

- Sts make a plan for their coming

holiday

5. CONSOLIDATION

:

- Retell the main points.

6.Home work:

- Give tasks

Vocabulary :

Itinerary (n) lé tr×nh

Gallery (n) phịng trng bày

Flight (n) chuyến bay

Via (Pre) theo đờng

Facilities (n) c¬ së, tiƯn nghi

Brochure (n) tờ rơi

Gym (n) phòng tập thể dôc

Humid (adi) Èm

Minus âm độ

Low (adj) thấp

* Pre

–

questions

:

Speaking

1. How much is a single/double room a

night ?

2. Is it near the city center ?

3. What is the departure/arrival time ?

4. Where can you visit ?

* Open prediction

:

Listening

City Weather LowTemperatureHigh
1. Sydney dry, windy 20 26
2. Tokyo dry, windy 15 22
3. London Humid, cold -3 7
4. Bangkok Warm, dry 24 32
5. NewYork Windy, cloudy 8 15
6. Paris cool, dry 10 16

* Mapped dialogue :

Where shall we
stay ?

Where should we
visit?

What time should
we leave Los
Angeles ?

- The Revere Hotel is
expensive but it has a
gym

- I think we should
visit Havard Medical
School, the Museum
and Arts Gallery

- There’s a daily flight
at 10 am, would that
be OK?

* Transformation:

Example :

Depart (Hue)………

Arrive (Ho Chi Minh City)

………

..

Accommodation

………

.

Sightseeing

………

.

Depart (HCM City)

…………

..

* Retell the main points of this lesson.

- Do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

Period 75.

Lesson 3 : read

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Reading

postcards for specific information.

II . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan , Pictures , chart ( true / false )

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to rewrite vocabulary of last

lesson.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss work in groups.

2.Pre- reading :

- Preteach vocabulary

- Checking vocab

- T sets the scene

- Ss pay attention to pre-questions

3.while- reading :

- Students read the text then complete

the grid

- Students read again and then do read 2

- Ss answer the questions from a, to e,

* Braintorm :

What do people do when traveling ?

(Ex: take photos, visit places of interest, eat

specialities, go swimming, go fishing,

climb mountain, go camping, go shopping,

buy souvenirs,…

I. Vocabulary:

- volcano (n) núi lửa

- pour out (v) phun trào

- be situated (v) đặt ở

- lava (n) nham thạch

- carve (v) Chạm, khc

- overhead (adv) phía trên đầu

- wharf (n) cầu tàu, cầu cảng

- valley (n) Thung lũng

* Slap the board :

* Pre-questions :

1. How many places did Mrs Quyen go to

in the U.S.A ?

2. Did she enjoy her tour ?

II. Practice :

1. Grids and forms :

Places

What she did and saw

a. Hawaii

b. NewYork

c. Chicago

d.Mount

Rushmore

e

.San Francisco

Went swimming, visited

Kilawea Volcano

Went shopping, bought a

lot of souvenirs

Saw Lake Michigan

Saw the heads of 4

American Presidents

Visited Fisherman's wharf,

the Napa Valley- wine

growing area and the

Alcatraz Prison

2. Comprehension questions :

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

4.Production:

- Ss work in 4 groups :

+ Group 1 and 3 discuss and write down

what Mrs.Quyen did and saw on her tour

in the USA

+ Group 2 and 4 discuss and write down

the reporter’s wuestions and what he

may want to know about Mrs. Quyen’s

tour.

- Ss work in pairs, one acts as Mrs.

Quyen and the other acts as the reporter

and interview each other.

5.CONSOLIDATION:

Retell the main points of thics lesson.

6.Homeworks:

- Give tasks

b. She saw the famous prison on the island

of Alcatraz

c. It is the mount where the heads of 4

American Presidents are carved into the

rock; and it can be seen from more than

100 km away

d. It is also called "The windy city"

e. She went shopping

* Interview :

- Some Ss retell the main points of the

lesson.

- Do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Period 76.

Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra

Teaching date 12 / 3 / 2009.

Answer for written test 3

(period 72 – English 8)

** Giáo viên đa đáp án.- cha tng phn .

Sửa lỗi học sinh hay mắc phải.

Nhận xét bài kiểm tra.

Gọi điểm.

I . 3Points :

1. b) order

2. a) immediately

3. c) will

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

6. c) sent

II. 3 points :

1. broken

2. am glad

3. turned on

4. punished

5. opening the window

6. finished

III. 2 points :

1. helping

2. get

3. made

4. talking

IV. 2points :

1. All the vegetable and meat are eaten ( by the children).

2. A new house will be built (by him ) there.

Unit 12 :a vacation AbRoad

Teaching date 13 / 3 / 2009.

Period 77.

Lesson4 : write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how

to write a postcard to a friend about the trip.(a tourist on vacation in a certain

place / city in Vietnam.

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.

drawing,

mime , picture, gap fill charts.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

- T reminds them of Mrs.Quyen’s

tour and then answer the questions

to play the game called “Lucky

number”

( Suggestion: 1. In the U.S.A

3. The Smiths

4. The heads of 4 American

Presidents

6. lots of souvenirs

7. Postcards )

2.Presentation:

- Sts read the postcard then fill in

the blanks the missing words

- Ss take note : information that

needed to write a postcard

3.Practice:

- Students use the information in

the book to write a postcard (Write

2 P.118)

4.Production:

- Work in groups and correct each

other

5. CONSOLIDATION:

- Some Ss to retell the main points.

- One by one

6.Homeworks:

- Give tasks

2, 5, lucky numbers

1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her

husband spend their holiday ?

3.Who did they visit when they were

in the U.S.A ?

4. What did they see on the Mount

Rushmore ?

6. What did Mrs Quyen buy ?

7. What did she send to her children

from the U.S.A ?

* Gap-fill :

1. in 2. people 3. weather 4.

visited

5. her 6. nice/lovely 7. bought

8. for

9. heaviness 10. soon

*Grid :

Place

We're having a

wonderful time in

the U.S.A

How do you

feel about the

people ?

The people are very

friendly

Weather

The weather has

been warm and

sunny

Who

you

meet/visit

I visit my friend,

Sandra Smith

What you see

(no information)

What you buy I bought a lot of

souvenirs



Writing :

- Ss imagine are a tourist on vacation

in a certain place / city in Vietnam.

Write a postcard to a friend about the

trip.

* Copare with their partner.

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Unit 12 :a vacation AbRoad

Teaching date 14 / 3 / 2009.

Period 78.

Lesson 5 : language focus

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Past

progressive with While,When and progressive tenses with “always” to complain.

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 12.

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.
Eg:

2.
LF1:

II/
***
*
*
LF2

* Warm up:

- T prepares some cards with verbs of actions.

- One of Ss from each team goes to the front ,picks

up one card and mimes. Ss of the other team guess

what the mime represents and say what s/he was

doing at 10,00 last Sunday.

Model sentences

1. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o'clock last night

2. They were talking to each other at that time

* Form:

S + Was/ were + V-ing…

Use: To indicate an action that was in progress at a

point of time in the past

* Picture Drill:

1. Hoa/have dinner

2. Bao/ read a comic

3. Nga/ write a letter

4. Na/ walk with her dog

5.Lan and her gradma/ talk to each other

Model sentences

The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came

The phone rang while Nga was eating

Form: Main clause + Adv clause

* Past progressive

when

Past simple

* Past simple

while

Past progressive

->Key to LF2:

a - C b - F c - E

d - B e - D f - A

Whole class
Team work

Teacher – Ss
- Copy down new
lesson.

- Work individually

- Look at the picture and
do exercises

- Work in pairs

- Some Ss to go to the
board to do exercises.
- Copy down new
Grammar.

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

III/
***

***

LF3

IV/
V/

Model sentence :

Bao is always forgetting his homework

be adv V-ing…

* Form:

S + to be + adv( always) + V_ing …

The present progressive tense with “always”

The progressive tenses are used with always to

express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a

complaint)

** Ss do language focus 3 P.120

-> Key :

b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella

c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus

d. Nam is always watching T.V late

f. Na is always talking on the phone

g. Liem is always going out

- Complete all the exercises in the notebook

- Prepare well for the next period.

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homeworks:

- Redo all exercises

- Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12.
- Prepare for next lesson.

Individual
Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .
some pairs practice each
exchange before going
on to another exchange .
Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
replacing the

information with the
words in the dictation
list .

Pair work

Ss to open their books
and read the multiple
choice questions
Individual

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Unit 13 : festivals

Teaching date 16 / 3 / 2009.

Period 79.

Lesson 1 : getting started

+ listen and read

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about

the rice cooking festival and to understand the rice cooking festival in VN.

Presenting vocab

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Time Teacher s activities’ Ss activitives’

***

I/
***

***

II/
1.

2.

III/

IV/
V/

*Getting started : Chatting

1.Tom likes swimming and sunbathing.

Where should he go ? Why ?

2. David is interested in ancient cities  ?

3.Huckleberry likes mountain-climbing  ?

4. Oliver is keen on pottery  ?

5. Robinson is fond of crowed places  ?

*Vocabulary

- fetch (v) ®i lÊy, mang vỊ

- yell (v) hÐt to cỉ vị

- urge (v) thóc giơc

- rub (v) xo¸

- participate (v) tham gia

- award (v) tặng thởng

- teamate (n) đồng đội

- competition (n) cuéc tranh tài

- judge (n) Giám khảo

* What and where.

* Listen and read : P.121

Pre- questions

1.How many competitions in the rice-cooking

festival?

2. Do all team members go to the river to fetch

water?

Rice-cooking festival

Water fetching Fire making Rice-cooking

To fetch water To make fire To cook rice

* Matching :

The grand prize

The starting position

The husk

a piece of bamboo

The council leader

Mét mÈu tre

Vá trÊu

Gi¶i nhÊt

Chủ tịch hội đồng giám khảo

Điểm xuất phát

a. F b. F c. T d, F e. F f. T

* Talk about the rice cooking festival:

- Three competions

- The way to fetch the water to cook rice

- The way to make fire

- The rice cooking contest

- The way to decide the winner of the contest

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

Group work of 4/5 Ss
-Some groups to give
their answers and
correct

- Copy down new
lesson.

- Repeat in chorus.
T – Ss

Whole class
Team work

- Ss to go to the board
and write their words.
Individual work

T – Ss

Students listen to the

dialoge then answer

the questions

Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss

Pair work

- Ss to write a story
using the information
from the dialogue .
Individual work

Ss guess the meaning of

the words of phrases by

matching.

Ss work in pairs or in

groups to talk about

the rice cooking

festival.

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

* Homeworks :

Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

- Listen and copy

down homeworks.

Unit 13 : festivals

Teaching date 19 / 3 / 2009.

Period 80.

Lesson 2 : speak + listen

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make up a dialogue and talk

about preparations for another festival .( Giving Ss practice in talking about

preparations for some festivals in VN).

- Then listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps.

- Develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills.

II. Teaching aids :

Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :

- Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue of unit 13.

=> T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

* Brainstorm :

decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room- buy

cakes, candies, drink, food, fruits

- Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy new

dress

- Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives

1. vocabulary

-Pomergranate (n) Quả lựu

- Peach blossoms (n) Hoa đào

- Dried waterlemon seeds (n) H¹t da

-Marigolds (n) : Cóc v¹n thä

- Sticky rice balls : bánh trôi

Spring rolls : Bánh tết , ch giò.

* Checking up: Rubout and remember

* Ordering : (Speak P.123)

Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual

Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in
chorus.

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

II/
***
1.

III/
***
1.

IV/
V/

A  F B  G C  H D  J E  J

Speaking :

* Make mini dialogue

Task 1: Decide who is going to do which

S1. We are having a class festival next week. I'm

going to buy asome flowers

S2: I'm going to decorate the room with……

S3:Great, I'm going to

…………

.

S4. I'm going to……

Task 2: A day before the class festival

S1: Have you bought flowers

S2: Ye, I bought them yesterday. What about

decorating the room

S3:

………

.

Listening :

1. Gap fill : (Listen 1)

Answer key

a. Mr Robinson/ flower market

b. traditional

c. dried watermelon seeds

d. make

2. Complete the notes :

Things to do

Mr

Robinson

Go to the flower market to buy Peach

blossoms and a bunch of marigolds

Mrs

Robinson

Go to Mrs Nga's to learn how to

make spring rolls

Liz

Go to the market to buy candies and

a packet of dried watermelon seeds



Consolidation:

Retell the main points of this lesson.



Homeworks:

- Learn by heart vocabulary

- Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .

- Make a dialogue.
- Work in pairs

Some pairs practice each
exchange before going
on to another exchange .
Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
replacing the

information with the
words in the dictation
list

- Listen and Gap fill
Pair work

Ss to open their books
and complete the notes.

Individual

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Unit 13 : festivals

Teaching date 21/ 3 / 2009.

Period 81.

Lesson 3 : read

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the

passive in the Present Simple

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word

square chart . pictures , drawing .

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :

- Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last

lesson.

-T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

II/
***

***

** Chatting :

1. When is Christmas held every year ?

(December 24th )

2. Do you celebrate Christmas ?

*. Vocabulary

- spread (v) (spread -spread) : Lan réng

- design (v) ThiÕt kÕ

- perform (v) performance (n) BiÓu diễn, buổi biểu diễn

- The patron saint (n) Thánh bảo hộ

- a Carol (n) bài hát giáng sinh

- Jolly (adj) = happy and cheerful (adj) vui tÝnh.

* Checking up: Matching.

* Read : P.124-125

* True/ Fasle statements :

1. Christmas is an important festival in every country

in the world

2. The custom of decorating a tree first appeared in

Europe

3. The leaders of the church were unhappy with

Christmas carols when they were first ferformed

4. Sending Christmas cards was an American's idea

-> Key :

1. F (not every but many countries in the world)

2. T 3. T

4. F (an Englishman's)

* Complete the grid : (Read 2 P.126)

Christmas

specials

Place of

origin

Date

The Christmas

tree

Riga

early 1500s

The Christmas

card

England

mid 19th

century

Christmas

carol

information

no

800 years

ago

Santa Claus

USA

1823

* Comprehension questions: (Read 2 P.126)

->Key :

a. More than a century ago

b. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends

c. 800 years ago

d. An American professor named Clement Clarke

Moore

e. On the description of Sain Nicholas in frofessor

Moore's poem

* Reporting :

Eg: On Christmas people often decorate a tree and they

send cards to relatives and friends…

Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual

Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in
chorus.

Individual
Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .

- Make a dialogue.
- Work in pairs
Some pairs practice each
exchange before going
on to another exchange .
Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
replacing the

information with the
words in the dictation
list

- Listen and Gap fill
Pair work

Ss to open their books
and complete the notes.

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

**
III/
IV/

* Write it up :

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.

* Homeworks :

- Learn by heart vocabulary

- Let students do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Unit 13 : festivals

Teaching date 23/ 3 / 2009.

Period 82.

Lesson4 : write

A / The aims :

I . Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to

Completing

a report about the rice – cooking festival.Writing a report about a festival they joined

recently

Develop Ss’ Writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures.

drawing,mime , picture, gap fill charts.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance .

II. Checking up:

- Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book.

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

II/
***

* Brainstorm

- fetching- water

- making- fire

- cooking- rice

- Six people take part in the rice cooking festiaval

- Fire is made in the traditional way

…

.

* Gapfill (write 1)

1. rice-cooking 2. one/a 3. water-fetching

4. run 5. water 6. traditional 7. bamboo

8. six 9. separate 10. added

* Understanding questions : (The answers to the

questions below can help you)

1. What does this report show?

2. Where was it held ?

3. How many competitions were there ?

4. What do each team do in each contest

Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual

Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in
chorus.

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

III/

***
IV/
V/

5. How was the festival ?

1. Name of the festival

2. Where was it held ?

3. How long did it last ?

4. Activities, competitions ?

5. How were the ativities organized ?

6. How many people took part in each activity ?

7. What did you think about the festival ?

* Write : Write the similar report on a festival you

joined recently.

Eg:

This report shows how the school festival was

held

The festival was held in the schoolyard. There

were two competitions: volleyball and jug of

war

In the volleyball game, the were six students in

each team and each class had a volleybal

team. The played against each other and the

8C team had most points got the grand prize.

There were ten students who took part in the

jug of war

Each class had a team and the 9B team won

all the others got the first prize.

The school festival was wonderful. it made all

the students love their school and study better.



Correction:



Consolidation:

Retell the main points of this lesson.



Homeworks :

Learn by heart vocabulary

- Let students do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .
-Work in pairs
Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
Pair work

- Write the report on a
festival

Ss to open their books
and complete the notes.

Individual

Then compare with their
friends.

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Unit 13 : festivals

Teaching date 27 / 3 /2009.

Period 83.

Lesson 5: language focus.

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in

using Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and

revising compound words and reported statements.

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up:

-Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.
Eg:

2.
LF1:

II/
LF2

III/
LF3

* Warm up:

* Net work : Preparations for Tet

Model sentences:

* Passive form:

Be + Past participle

Matching:

Tenses

Form

1. Present simple

2. Past simple

3. Future simple

4. Present perfect

a. Was/were + V.pp

b. Have/has been + V.pp

c. Is/are/am + V.pp

d. will/shall be + V.pp

* Gapfill :

* LF1: P.128

a. were performed b. was decorated/ put

c. is made d. will be held

e. was awarded f. was written

* LF2: P.128-129

- To jumble : lén xén, lµm lÉn lén

1. jumbled 2. broken 3. broken

4. scattered 5. pulled

* Compound nouns :

A rice cooking festival

(article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun)

- To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing

* LF 3 : P.130

Answer key

a. A fire-making contest

b. A bull-fighting festival

c. A car-making industry

d. A flower-arranging contest

e. A rice-exporting country

f. A. clothes-washing machine

* Reported speech :

Model sentences :

He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech

He said he was a plumber -> reported speech

Changes:

1. Tenses:

Direct speech

Indirect-reported speech

Whole class
Team work

Teacher – Ss
- Copy down new
lesson.

- Work individually

- Look at the books and
do exercises

- Work in pairs

- Some Ss to go to the
board to do exercises.
- Copy down new
Grammar.

- Individual

Individual
Pair work

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

IV/
LF 4

V/
VI/

present simple

will / must / can

past simple

would / had to / could

2.Pronouns:

Depend on the Subject of the main clause

3. Advs of time:

This  that / now  then / here  there

today  that day / tomorrow  the next day

Yesterday  the day before / ago  before

* LF 4 : P.130 :

Transformation drill

b. He said he could fix the faucets

c. He said the pipes were broken

d. He said new pipes were expensive

e. He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homeworks:

- Redo all exercises

- Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12.
- Prepare for next lesson.

Teacher –Ss

Ss to work in pairs ,
replacing the

information with the
words in the dictation
list .

Pair work

Ss to open their books
and do exercises.
Individual

Some Ss Retell the main
points of this lesson.
Copy down homeworks

Teaching date : 30 /03 / 2009.

Period 84 .

REVISION

A/ The aims:

I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using

Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound

words and reported statements.

Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13

- Develop Ss’ four skills.

II. Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters .

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue.

- Two others to retell the main structure grammar .

- Teacher corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

***

I/
1.

****

* GRAMMAR:

* Passive form:

Be + Past participle

Matching:

Tenses

Form

1. Present simple

2. Past simple

3. Future simple

4. Present perfect

a. Was/were + V.pp

b. Have/has been + V.pp

c. Is/are/am + V.pp

d. will/shall be + V.pp

* Compound nouns :

A rice cooking festival

(article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun)

- To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing

* Reported speech :

Model sentences :

He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech

He said he was a plumber -> reported speech

Individual

Teacher – Ss
Work with a partner
Pair work

- Ss to read the

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

2.

II/

III/
IV/

Changes:

1. Tenses:

Direct speech

Indirect-reported speech

present simple

will / must / can

past simple

would / had to / could

2.Pronouns:

Depend on the Subject of the main clause

3. Advs of time:

This  that / now  then / here  there

today  that day / tomorrow  the next day

Yesterday  the day before / ago  before

Have Ss copy

Read the following passage and choose the item (a,

b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions

about it.

Hi! I’m Dean. I’m from England. My favorite time

of the year is Christmas, which is on 25 December.

That’s when Christians celebrate the birth of Christ. In

the middle of December we send a lot of cards to our

friends and family, here and abroad. Then we get a big

tree and decorate it with lights and other things. On

Christma Day, we give each other presents. We have

one enormous meal with turkey, and after that, we

have Christmas pudding.

1. When is Christmas held?

a. On 25 December / b. In the middle of December

c. In the middle of the year / d. no information

2.Christmas is held because Christians want to__.

a. have a good time/ b. celebrate the birth of Christ

c. visit their friends and family / d. decorate big trees

3. What does the word ‘decorate’ in line 5 mean?

a. make something look nicer/ b. paint something

c. make something look worse / d. buy something

4. On Christmas Day, people_____ .

a. give each other presents / b. have an enormous

meal with turkey / c. have Christmas pudding

d. all are correct

5. Which of the following is not true?

a. Dean is English.

b. At Christmas, people get big trees and decorate it.

c. Dean prefers Halloween to Christmas.

d. In the middle of December, people send a lot of

Christmas cards to their friends and family.

*Work with a partner

- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary

- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the
words in the box

- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct.

- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .
* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points of this lesson.
* Homework :

1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents
are delighted that he passed his English exam ……”

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

in the correct order
according to

theinstructions
- Ss to rewrite the
sentences in the passive
form

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Individual
Whole class

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Whole class

Ss to read the letter and
match the words

Individual

Ss to give their answers
Read the letter aloud
Ss to read the complete
letter aloud

Listen and copy

ss to work in pairs to
complete the letter using
the words in the box
work in pairs.

- Retell the main points
of this lesson.

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Unit14 : wonders of the world

Teaching date 2 / 4 / 2009.

Period 85.

Lesson 1 : getting started

+ listen and read

A / The aims

I. Teaching points: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to seek

information about a language game to complete a summary.

I . Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson

plan.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to do Ex L.f 3.

- T. corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson:

Time Teacher s activities’ Ss activitives’

***

I/
***
***

II/
1.

*Getting started : Matching

a. The Pyramid

b. Sydney Opera House

c. Stonehenge

*. Vocabulary

- Clue (n) Manh mèi

- Rule (n) luËt ch¬i

* Presentation dialogue :

(Listen and read – P.131-132)

* Gapfill : (Listen and read 2 P.132)

1. game 2. place 3. clue 4. Vietnam

5. American 6. Gold 7. right 8. was

** Sets the scene:

" Nga , Nhi and Hoa are playing a language game

called guessing game. How does this game work?

Rearrange the statements in the right order of the

game"

- Puts the statements chart on the board.

- Asks sts to read the statements and put them in the

right order.

- Calls on some pairs to go to the board and write

their answers

( - wonder (n): kú quan

- gold gate bridge: cầu cổng vàng

- clue (n): gỵi ý )

While- reading:

Sts to open their books and read the dialogue on

page 131, 132 while listening to the tape

* Ordering sentences :

How to play the guessing game?

1. B asks questions to find out what it is

2. A thinks of a famous person or place

3. B wins if he/she can guess the correct answer

Group work of 4/5 Ss
-Some groups to give
their answers and
correct

- Copy down new
lesson.

- Repeat in chorus.

- Asks sts to open their

books and read the

dialogue on page 131,

132 while listening to

the tape

- Plays the tape.

- Checks if sts' guesses

are right or not

- Have sts to copy

statements in the right

order

T – Ss

Students listen to the

dialoge then answer

the questions

Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss

Pair work

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

2.

III/

IV/
V/

4. A gives B a clue

5. B loses if he/she can't guess the correct answer

6. A only can answer "yes" or "no"

->Key: 2 - 4 - 1 - 6 - 3- 5

*Grammar :

Model sentences:

I don't know

how to play it

* Form:

S + V + question word + to infinitive...

*Use:

Reduced form of an indirect question

Ex: I don't know how can I play it

how to play it

Please tell me where I can go during the visit

where to go

A B

Eg: I don't know how I can play it

to play it

b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets

c. Nga pointed out where to buy sourvenirs

d.Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to H.An

e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit

* Guessing game :

Teacher: It is a wonder and it is in Asia

St:(guess)

Teacher : yes/ no

* Consolidation:

- Retell the main points ò thí leson.

* Homeworks:

- Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Individual work

Ss guess the meaning of

the words of phrases by

matching.

- Asking sts to read the

summary again

- Write the words on

the board

- Asks sts to match the

words in column A

with their explanations

in column B

- Asks some sts to give

their answers

- Retell the main

points.

- Listen and copy

down homeworks.

Unit14 : wonders of the world

Teaching date 4 / 4 / 2009.

Period 86.

Lesson 2

:speak + language focus 2

A / The aims :

I. Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make

a report on a famous places using reported speech

- Further practice in seeking information about famous places or people

using “Yes / No” questions both in “direct speech” and “indirect speech”

- Develop Ss’ speaking

II. Teaching aids :

Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD.

B/ Steps of the lesson:

I. Organization:

- Greeting and checking attendance.

II. Checking up :

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

=> T corrects and give them marks.

III. New lesson :

***

II/
***
1.

\
2.

Warm- up:

Who is the fastest?

- Informs the topic and time limit.

- Delivers posters to sts

- Tells sts to put their posters on the board

- Gives feedback and corrects

*Write 10/15 famous world places within 3 minutes.

* Speak:

1. It was designed and built by the French civil

engineer with 300 meters in height

2. It is in Sound Central Asia, 8,848 meters high

above sea level.

3. It was built from 246- 208 BC and some people

say it can be seen from the moon.

4. It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of

the houses of Parliament in London.

Answer key:

1. Eiffel Tower. / 2. Mount Everest

3. Great wall of china . / 4. Big Ben

5. Empire State building USA (toà nhà thơng mại

Mỹ)

6. Phong Nha cave (động Phong Nha)

Suggest:

1. Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris?

2. Is the Empire State Building located in New York

city?

3. Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in

Malaysia?

4. Is the Great Barrier Reef in Australia?

5. Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore?

6. Is Mount Everest in Nepal?...

Modal sentences:

I said to Lan, "Is Hue citadel in the central

Vietnam?"

(Yes/ no questions  direct speech)

* Sets the scene:

+ Ask a st: (Lan)

T: Is Hue citadel in the central Vietnam?

- Asks sts to listen:

T: I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in the central

Vietnam. She said that it was

I asked Lan

If

whether

Hue citadel was in

the Central Vietnam

( Main clause)

Indirect (yes/ no )

question

Concept check:

Indirect: Yes/ No question

Form:

V + O + if / whether + S + V

Use: - to say  to ask / want to know

- If the verb in the main clause is in past tense, the

tense in the indirect questions must be changed:

Direct question Indirect question

Present simple  past simple

Whole class
Team work
Teacher – Ss
Individual

Copy down new lesson.
- Listen and repeat in
chorus.

Individual
Pair work

Ss to work in pairs and
give their answers .

Sts to write yes/no

questions about 10

places in the box,

using the information

in the matching.( each

st in a group asks a

question)

- Monitors and assists

sts if necessary

Sts ask and answer the

questions, checks yes

or no

-A group to

demonstrate their work

S: Yes, it is

- Write the statement

on the board.

- Have sts to copy

Individual

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

III/
***

IV/
V/

Past simple  past perfect

Present perfect  Past perfect

Yes no
- Is Phong Nha cave in Southern

Viet Nam?

- Is Petronas Twin Towers the tallest
building in the world?

- Is the great Barrier Reef a world
Heritage Site?

- Is the Empire State Building in
Australia?

- Is Ha Long bay a world Heritage
Site?

- Is Big Ben in Paris French?




Ex: I asked Hoa if Phong Nha cave in Southern Viet

Nam. She said that it wasn’t

……

.

* Language focus 2:

Sets the scene:

“Yesterday Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one

of the world culture Heritage of Vietnam. Beside

answering some of Nhi's question, Nga gave her

some additional information about My Son .

”

- Asks sts to report what Nhi asked Nga, using

reported speech.

- Calls on some sts to resay the use of the Indirect

Yes/ No question if necessary

- Shows the questions on the board

- Models the first question and asks sts to listen.

a. Do you know My Son, Nga?

 Nhi asked Nga if / whether she knew My Son

b. Nhi asked Nga if / whether it was far from Ha

Noi.

c. Nhi asked Nga if / whether My Son was Quang

Nam province

d. Nhi asked Nga if / whether Many people lived at

My Son

e. Nhi asked Nga if / whether Many tourists visited

My Son every year

f. Nhi asked Nga if / whether She wanted to visit My

Son one day



Consolidation:

Retell the main points of this lesson.



Homeworks:

- Learn by heart vocabulary

- Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

the model (asking and

reporting)

- Some pairs in each

group to demonstrate

the exchanges and the

tell one of them to

report.

- Have sts work in

their groups

- Calls on sts in

different groups to

report in front of the

class

- Gives feedback and

corrects

Sets the scene:

- Calls on some sts to

resay the use of the

Indirect Yes/ No

question if necessary

- Shows the questions

on the board

- Models the first

question and asks sts

to listen.

- Student to read the

question, another

student read the

reported speech

sentence

- Retell the main

points.

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

Period : 84

Date of preparing: 19/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

Unit14 :

wonders of the world

Lesson 2 : speak + listen

I.The objectives:

- Further practice in seeking information about famous places or people

using “Yes / No” questions both in “direct speech” and “indirect speech”

- Listening for details by deliberating the mistakes.

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

Teacher asks students 10 yes/no

questions about 10 places

2.Pre- stages:

- T presents vocab

- Students read the advertisement and

try to guess the mistakes

- Ss take notes in reported speech with

yes/no questions

- Sts notice the changes

3.Practice:

- Student use the questions in the warm

up stage and report them (groups of

three)

- Students listen to the tape then check

their predictions

- Students listen again then give their

answers

4.Production:

- Students write the reported speech in

their notebooks

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

* Chatting:

Questions Places

1. Is the Great Wall in England ? No/ China
2. Is Stonehenge in England Yes
3. Is Phong Nha Cave in Vietnam Yes
4. Is Mount Everest in Nepal ? Yes
5. Is the Empire State Building in

San Francisco ? No/ New York
6.Is Ha Long Bay in Southern VN? Yes

7. Is Hue Citadel a World Heritage Yes

8. Is Big Ben in France ? No/ England
9. Is Great Barrier Reef a World

Heritage ? Yes
10. Is Eiffel Tower in Australia ? No/ France

I.Vocabulary

- an inn (n) Qu¸n trä

- a jungle (n) Rừng rậm nhiệt đới

- a rain forest (n) Rừng ma nhiệt đới

- Crystal clear (adj) trong suốt nh pha lê

- Coral sea (n) Biển san hơ

- Snokel (v) B¬i lỈn cã sư dơng èng thë

* Read the advertisement :(Listen P.133)

* Reported speech with yes/no questions

Model sentences

I said to Lan"Is the Great Wall in England ?"

 I asked Lan if/whether the Great Wall is

in England

Form: S + asked + (O) if/whether S + V

* Notice the changes:

say  asked

question  statement

Simple present  simple past

Eg: I asked Tung if/whether Stonehenge

was in England. He said it was

II. Practice :

1. Speaking :

Eg:

Lan : Is Phong Nha Cave in Vietnam?

Hoa: Yes

Ha: Lan asked Hoa if/whether Phong Nha

Cave was in Vietnam. She said it was

2. Listening :

*Key :

Southern -> Far North

Inn -> Hotel

Jungle-> rainforest

6824 -> 6924

3. Reporting :

Eg: Tung asked Hien if/whether Big Ben

was in France. She said it wasn't. It was in

England

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 85

Date of preparing: 19/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

Unit14 :

wonders of the world

Lesson 3 : read

I.The objectives:

- Reading for detail of the text about the wonders of the world

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /30

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- T erminds them of the wonders of the

world they have known

2.Pre- reading :

- Preteach vocabulary

- Checking vocab

-T sets the scene

* Brainstorm :

The wonders of the world

The Hanging Garden of Babylon/ Iraq

The Statue of Zeus/ Greece

Angkor Wat/ Cambodia

The Taij Mahal/ India

The Lighthouse Alexandria

The Statue of Jupiter/ Greece

The Actimitst's temple/ Turkey

The Statue of Apollon/ Greece

I. Vocabulary:

- Compile (v) Biên soạn, tập hợp

- Claim (v) Khẳng định, tuyên bố

- Honor (v) Thờ

- Survive (v) Tån t¹i, sèng sãt

- God (n) Chúa

- Religious (adj) Thuộc tôn giáo

- Royal (adj) hoµng téc, hoµng gia

* slap the board :

* Read : (P.134)

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

3.while – reading :

-Sts read the text then check their

predictions

- Students read again and then do the

exercise 1

4.Post- reading :

- Lucky numbers

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

wolrd

1. The Hanging Garden of Babylon/ Iraq

2. The Statue of Zeus/ Greece

3. The Pyramids of Cheops

4. The Lighthouse Alexandria

5. The Statue of Jupiter/ Greece

6. The Statue of Apollon/ Greece

7. The Actimitst's temple/ Turkey

->Key : (Read a-d P.134)

a, C b, A

c, D d, B

* Lucky numbers (2,4 are lucky numbers)

1. Where is The Golden Gate Bridge ? (San

Francisco)

3. Which is the longest structure in the

world ? (The Great Wall)

6. Which is the largest temple of the

world ? (Angkor Wat)

6. How long is the Great Wall of China ?

(over 6.000km)

7. Where is Angkor Wat ? (Cambodia)

- Let students do the exercises in the

workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 86

Date of preparing: 19/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

Unit14 :

wonders of the world

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to write a

narrative

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /30

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss repeat

- Give feedback

2.Pre- writing :

- Preteach vocabulary

-Ss read the letter and then complete the

letter by matching.

3.while-writing :

- Students read the outline and prepare

to write a letter

- Sts write the letters

- T gives sample

4.Post – wriring :

- Work in groups and correct

*Brainstorm

How to describe a place

- Name

- Weather

- Sights

- Accommodation

- How to go there

Vocabulary

- ranger (n) Ngời bảo vệ rừng, quản lí công

viên

- edge (n) Cạnh , mép

- canyon (n) hẻm núi

- breathtaking (adj) hấp dẫn, ngoạn mục

- temperate (adj) ôn đới

- stone age (n) Thời kì đồ đá

* Matching: (Write 1. P.135)

1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A

Outline

-

Place:( Ha Long Bay, Cuc Phuong

National Park)

-

Distance: ( about 100km, 12 hours

by train

…

)

-

Sights: (beautiful, breathtaking

…

)

-

Weather: (temperate, sunny, cool

…

)

-

How do you feel (happy, relaxed

…

)

E.g :

(date, month)

Dear

……

,

How are you ? I hope you and your family

still has a good health and you will have a

good result for your exam.

My family has just return from a trip to Ha

Long Bay. It is a world heritage site. We

spent 5 days there and I didn’t want to

leave.

There are many beautiful limestone islands

and magnificent caves.

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

vaccation ? Write to me.

Your friend,

(Signature)

- Let students do the exercises in the

workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 87

Date of preparing:19/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

Unit14 :

wonders of the world

Lesson 5 : language focus 1,2,4

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the past simple passive

and reported speech with the “yes/no questions”

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, ...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /30

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss play a game “bingo” with vocab

2.Presentation:

- Ss revise grammar : Passive form and

reported speech, especially reported

BINGO

temperate, breathtaking, royal, religious,

canyon, pyramids, edge, god, jungle,

compile

Passive

Was/ were + V.pp

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

speech with yes/no questions.

- Ss take notes : tha changes

3.Practice:

- Ss do exercises : language focus 1,2,4

- Give answers

4.Production:

- Ss do transformation exercise

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

Reported speech

Model sentences

I said to Lan " Is the Great Wall in England

?"

 I asked Lan if/whether the Great Wall in

England

Form: S + asked + (O) if/whether S + V

*Notice the changes:

say  asked

question  statement

Simple present  simple past

Language focus 1:

a. was completed

b. was constructed

c. was designed

d. was presented

e. was reached

Language focus 2:

a. Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Ha

Noi

b. Nhi asked Nga whether My Son was

in Quang Nam province

c. Nhi asked Nga if many people lived

at My Son

d. Nhi aske Nga whether many tourists

visited My Son every year

e. Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit

My Son once day

Language focus 4: To

–

infi or bare infi

1. to jog

2. go

3. to gather

4. to rain

5. to reach

6. to continue

7. get

* Transformation :

1. He said to me “Do you learn

English ?”

 He asked me...

2. She did the test perfectly

 The test...

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

Period : 88

Date of preparing:28/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

revision

I.The objectives:

- To revise all the knowledge needed to the test

- To prepare well for the test

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /29

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1. warm up

The present perfect tense

2. Presentation

a. Passive form

( Widen to modal verb such as can,

will, coul, shall, may, must..)

b. Reported speech

(Statements, yes/no questions)

3. Practice

Students do the exercises given by the

teacher

1. They (buy) that car recently

2. She (already/do) her homework

3. He (see) that film yet ?

1. have bought

2. has already done

3. Has he seen

1. Passive form

Act: S + V + O

Pass: S + be + Vpp + by O

Note: Tense of the verb “be” depending on

the verb and the O in the active sentence

Ex: She cooks breakfast everymorning

 Breakfast is cooked every morning (by

her)

1. She told that story



2. They have built that house for a long

time



3. He wrote a letter yesterday



4. They can reuse the empty bottles



2. Reported speech

a. He said “ I am a plumper”



</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

4. Production

- Reading

- Pronunciation

5. Homework



c. He said “ Do you speak English”



The reading passages of unit 10 to unit 14

(recycling, traveling a round Vietnam, A

vacation abroad, festiaval, wonders of the

world )

The pronounciation of vowels : A, E, I, O,

U and consonants

- Prepare for the test

Period : 89

Date of preparing:28/3/ 08

Date of teaching:

test

I.The objectives:

- To carry out professional regulations

- To check Ss’s understandings

- To find out more effective methods of teaching.

II.The teaching aids

:

- uestion sheets , keys,...

III. The teaching procedure:

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /29

B.the test :

I. Questions:

I. Chọn đáp án đúng cho mỗi chỗ trống bằng cách khoanh tròn vào đáp án A,B,C

hoặc D để hoàn thành câu:

1. Who was you...on the telephone when I came in?

A. talk

B.talking

C.to talk

D. talked

2. HaLong bay... as a world heritage site by UNESCO.

A. recognizes

B.recognized

C.is recognized

D. was recognized

3. Would you ...giving me some informations about Singapore tours?

A. mind

B. like

C. know

D. interest

4. The cartoon character Mickey Mouse... by Walt Disney

A. created

B.is created

C. was created

D. was creating

5. Singing contest ... in our schoolyard tomorrow afternoon.

A. is held

B. will be held

C. was held

D. is holding

6. At Tet holiday, almost Vietnamese houses ... .

A. are redecorated or repainted

B. redecorated or repainted

C. are redecorate or repainted

D. are redecorating or painting

7. He... to the best student in our school

A. is saying

B. is said

C. said

D. says

8. Ngan asked me ... Halong Bay was in Northern Viet Nam.

A. as

B. if

C. so

D. that

9. Could you please tell me how...a sticky rice cake?

A. to make

B. is making

C. make

D. to be made

10.She asked me whether I ...Sa Pa

A. know

B. to know

C. knew

D. were knowing

II. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi chọn đáp án đúng bằng cách khoanh tròn vào đáp án

A,B,C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu về đoạn văn :

The Pyramid of Khufu (Cheops in Greece ) is the largest, oldest and only true

surviving member of the seven wonders of the Ancient World. It was built in the 26

century BC. It held the world’s tallest men - made structure title for over 4400 years

until 1889 when the Effel Tower was built.The base area of Khufu’s Pyramid is equal in

size to thatof six big – city blocks.Most of the chiseled stones used to build this

pyramid are as big as small pickup trucks. The rugged exterior we see today on

Pharaoh Khufu’s tomb was originally covered by a beautiful smooth limestone

surfacing.

11. The Pyramid of Khufu is one of the____________wonders of the Ancient World.

A. six

B. eight

C. seven

D. nine

12. It was built in__________________

A. 2600 BC

B. year 2600

C. the 26

century BC

D. the year 2600

13. The Pyramid of Khufu was the world’s tallest man – made structure title

until___________________

A. the Effel Tower was built

B. today

C. 26

century BC

D. 1989

14. The base area of Khufu’s Pyramid is as big as _____________________

A. six houses

B. six trucks

C. small pickup trucks

D. six big-city blocks

15. What was the rugged exterior we see today on Pharaoh Khufu’s tomb was

originally covered by________________________?

A. a beautiful smooth gemstone surfacing

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

IV. Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C, hoặc D để chuyển những câu hỏi sau sang

câu gián tiếp :

16. “Do you like English,Nga?”, My mother asked.

A. My mother asked her if she liked English

B. Her mother asked her if she liked English

C. My mother asked me if I liked English

D. My mother asked me if I like English

17. “ Have you ever been to Phong Nha cave?”, she asked Tom

A. She asked Tom if he had ever been to Phong Nha cave

B. She asked Tom whether he was in Phong Nha cave

C. She asked Tom if he went Phong Nha cave

D. She asked Tom if he has ever been to Phong Nha cave

18. “ What places have you already visited ?”,she asked me.

A. She wanted to know what places I already visited.

B. She wanted to know what places I had already visited.

C. She wanted to know what places I have already visited.

D. She wanted to know what places have I already visited.

V. Hoàn thành các câu sau dựa vào từ gợi ý :

19. Nga / say / she / visit Phong Nha cave / twice

-> ...

20 . I / ask / Tam / if / the Great Wall / in / China

-> ...

II. KEY: Total 10 marks (0,5 marks per correct number)

1. B

2. D

3.A

4. C

5. B

6. A

7. B

8. B

9. A

10.C

11. C

12. C

13. A

14. D

15.B

16.C

17. A

18.B

19. Nga / say / she / visit Phong Nha cave / twice

-> Nga said she had visitted PN cave twice

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

Period : 90

Date of preparing:5/4/ 08

Date of teaching:

test correction

I.The objectives:

- To help Ss find what they are false,and what mistakes they often make

- Consolidate what Ss haven’t yet reached.

- correct the test.

II. comments :

Good :

Fair :

Average :

Poor :

Weak :

15%

25%

45%

14%

1%

->85% of students reach the basic knowledge

-> Usage skills : 50 %

III. guidline :

- Reinforce regularly tests, exercises ,etc.

- Check students’ studying more often

IV. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /28

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /30

B.corrections :

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

- T recalls structures and grammatical

matters appearing in the test.

- Ss focus and correct their test on their

own

I. Correction :

1. Structure with “mind”

2,3,4,9,10. Passive forms

5,6. Indirected speech with “if/whether”

7. Past progressive tense with

“when/while”

8. “How” + to – infinitive

11,12,13,14,15 : Reading comprehension

about Pyramid Cheops – one of the seven

wonders of the Ancient World.

17,18,19 : Indirect speech with questions

20,21 : Writing skill – rewriting

sentences

Home work :

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

Period : 91

Date of preparing: 13/4/08

Date of teaching:

Unit 15: computer

Lesson 1:

getting started + listen and read

I.The objectives:

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get Ss to differentiate facts from

opinions through reading , and express their opinions about a problem .

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- T writes the topic on the board .

- Ask Ss to think of the topic and

express their opinions .

- Collect Ss

opinions and write them

on the board .

=> T leads in the new lesson .

2.Presentation:

- T introduces the topic of the passage

reading and some new words to

students .

- Checking : Matching vocab

- True/ false statements

- Students listen to the dialoge then

check their predictions

- Students practice the dialogue and do

read 2 (P.139)

- Ss take note: the structure with “ yet”

and “ already”.

3.Practice:

- Ss work in pairs

- Give feedback

Getting started ( Brainstorming )

1. Vocabulary

- print (v) in

- jam (v)

- connect (v) kÕt nèi

- be under guarantee còn thời hạn bảo hành

- the manual : Híng dÉn sư dơng

- a plug (n) phÝch cắm điện

- a socket (n) ổ cắm điện

* matching :

* T/F predictions :

1. The computer isn’t working

2. His father can’t help him to repair it

3.They have to phone the store in HCM

City for hepl

1. F 2. T 3. T

Read 2:

a. F b. O c. O d. F e. F f. O

* Model sentences : The prensent perfect

tense with “yet” and “already”

S1: Have you turned it on yet ?

S2: Yes, I have already done it

* Word cue drills :

1. Printer/ not work/ turn it on

2. Printer/ not print/ connect

3. Mouse/not work/ check the plug

4. Computer/ not work/ check the plug

Ex:

S1: The printer isn’t working

Computer

can help us...

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

4.Production:

- Ask Ss to use reported speech to

rewrite the dialogue

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

S2: Have you turned it on yet ?

S3: Yes, I have already done it

* Write it up :

Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 92

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 15 : computer

Lesson 2 : speak + listen

I.The objectives:

- Expressing and responding to opinions about things

- Listening for details

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

- Ss match

- Ss chat following the given questions

2.Pre- stage :

- T presents vocab

- Ss work in groups to tell one another

about the activities for each pictures

(P.139) and the adjectives (P.140)

- T elicits the answers from Ss

- Ss describe the chart by answering the

given questions.

3.while – stage:

- Students read the dialogue (Speak 2. P

140)

- Students make similar dialogue using

given items (P.140)

- Students listen to the tape then

complete the chart

- Students listen again then give their

answers

I like

I don't like

I think

I don't believe

Neither do I

You are right

So do I

I agree

* Chatting:

1. Can we buy a drink from a machine ?

2. Can we buy a drink from a machine

by pressing the start button on the

machine?

3. Have you ever tried doing this?

1. Vocacbulary:

- entertaining (adj)

- challenging (adj)

- amusing (adj)

- mornitor (n)

- adjust (v)

- insert (v)

- press (v)

- button (n)

- coin (n)

- change

- indicate (v)

- circle (n)

- triangle (n)

* Describe the picture:

a. Learning to driving a car is challenging

b. Reading a comic book...

c. walking in the rain...

d. I don't like foreign food...

Ex:

S1: I think learning to drive a car is difficult

S2: I agree with you and I think it's also

interesting

* Describing the chart: (P.141)

- How to buy a drink from a machine?

1. What does the chart show you ?

- How to buy a drink from a machine

2. What do the circles indicate ?

starting or stopping point?

3. What do the triangles indicate ? (questions)

* Make dialogue: How to express ideas

E.x:

S1: I'm having problem with my computer

S2: What's wrong ?

S1: The monitor doesn't work. The screen is

too dark

S2: No. You should adjust the nob

S1: Oh! Sorry

* Listen and complete the chart : (P.141)

find a
machine

a. Do you have
the correct
change

b. yes

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

4.Post – stage :

- Ss report the chart.

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

*Chain game :

First, find a machine

Then, ask yourself if you have the correct

change

Next, if you have, ask yourself what you

want to drink

After thet, insert the coin and press the

button

Finally, take the drink when it appears

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 93

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 15 : computer

Lesson 3: read

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about how

computers work in a university

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss work in groups to play the game

2.Presentation:

- T presents vocab

-T Sets the scene : the passage

- Ss predict

3.while – reading :

-Ss read the passage and the check their

predictions.

* Brainstorm

Things computer can help us....

-

Save time

-

E-mail

-

Storing information

-

Relaxing

-

Traveling around the world

-

Enrich khowledge

1. Vocabulary

- store (v)

- have access to a computer : Đ

ờng dẫn

- make requirement for : đặt ra y/c với

- be restricted to : Bị hạn chế

- be skeptical about : Hoài nghi về ....

- get a degree : đạt đợc bằng cấp

- freshmen : SV năm thứ nhất

* Checking: slap the board

* Open prediction : What are we going to

read ?

* T/F statements:

a. T b. T c. T

d. F: Students don’t have to go to computer

rooms because college campuses now have

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

- Ss answer the questions

4.Post – reading :

- Give feedback : answer

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

computer jacks in every part of the

university

e. T f. T

2. Comprehension questions:

a. It has no library. All th information

normally found in a library is now stored in

the university’s computers

b. All the information normally found in a

library or messages normally found on a

bulletin board

c. A computer and a telephone line

d. With a bulletin board on the internet, a

great number of people (over 20 million)

can get access to the bulletin and exchange

information quickly.

e. Sts’ answers

Let students do the exercises in the

workbook.

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 94

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 15 : computer

Lesson 4 : write

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to write instructions

II.The teaching aids

:

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- T reminds them of vocab

2.Presentation:

- Preteach vocabulary

- Concept checking vocab

- Matching the picture to the words

-T presents some phrasal verbs

3.Practice:

- Students read the cues and work in

pairs to outline the instructions

- Sts write the the instructions

4.Production:

- Work in groups and correct

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

Jumbled words

Snerec = Screen

motorin = monitor

wepor = power

pertirn = printer

btontu = button

gulp = plug

1. Vocabulary

- power button

- input tray

- monitor screen

- output path

- remove (v)

- flash (v)

- click (v)

* Slap the board :

* Matching

a - 3 b- 1 c - 6

d - 2 e - 4 f - 5

Phrasal verbs

- wait for so/sth

- to remove sth

- to turn on/off a machine

- to plug in sth

- to load sth

* Writing : the instructions on how to use

the printer

Answer key

Plug in the printer and turn on the power.

Remove the old paper and load the new

paper in the paper input tray

Wait for the power button to flash

Have the pages appear on the computer

screen

Click the printer icon on the screen and

wait for a few seconds

The printed paper will get out from the

output path in a minute

Let students do the exercises in the

workbook

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

Period : 95

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit : computer

Lesson 5 : language focus

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use “ yet “ and “ already “ to express

the present perfect .

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’

activities

1,Warm – up:

Team work

- Write 10 numbers on the

board ( 1 to 10 )

- Tell Ss each number is for a

question but 3 of them are

lucky numbers . IF Ss choose

a lucky number , they do not

have to answer any question

but they will get 2 points and

they can choose another

Lucky number

( Consolidation of Tenses )

Questions

1. What does your father do ?

2. What did you do last night ?

3. Lucky number

4. How often is Hue Festival held ?

5. Lucky number

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

number .

- Divide the class into 2

teams.

2.Presentation:

- Show the chart ( Ba

s diary )

on the board

- Ask questions and elicit the

answers from Ss .

T : Has Ba done his

homework yet ?

- Ss give the comparison of

the two tenses : Present

perfect and past simple tenses

3.Practice:

- Ss do language focus 1- 4

4.Home work:

- Give tasks

moment ?

8. Who often cooks in your family ?

9. Which grade will you be in next school year ?

10.Lucky number .

Language focus 1,2 :

Present perfect with Yet and already

- Yet : used in questions and negative statements

- Already : used in positive statements

+ Yet : at the end of the sentence .

+ Already : between auxiliary have and past

participle

EX:

T : Has Ba done his homework yet ?

S : Yes , he has already done his homework .

T : Has Ba tidied the room yet ?

S : No, he has not tidied the room yet .

* Comparisons :

Present perfect tense

Past simple

Use : - finished actions

with indefinite time

- incomplete actions

with “for , since ,

recently”

Form : Have / has + Past

participle

Finished action with

definite time .

* Present perfect or past simple tenses :

Examples

Finished

action

Incomplete

action

a) I have been to SaPa

highlands .

v

b) They have lived in

Ca Mau for 10 years .

v

c). She has finished her

homework .

v

d) She has worked with

the computer since

early morning.

v

e) We have found the

troubles of the printer .

v

f) Someone has

unplugged the printer .

v

g) People have received

information through the

internet recently .

v

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

Period : 96

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 16 : inventions

Lesson 1:

getting started + listen and read

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the origin of paper and talk

about the process of producing something

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss answer the questions leading in the

lesson

2.Presentation:

- T presents vocab

- Concept checking vocab

- T sets the scene

- Student listen to the dialoge then

check their predictions

- Students Practice the dialogue in

groups

- Student answer the steps

- Ss revise : passive forms

*Getting started : Matching

Where are they from ?

What are they doing ?

What is it ?

A -b B - c C - e

D - a E - d

1. Vocabulary

- crush (v) Ðp, nghiÒn

- liquefy (v) ho¸ láng

- grind (v) (ground - ground) xay, nghiÒn

nhá

- manufacture (v) = produce : sản xuất

- process (n) Quá trình

- mold (n) khuân

- conveyor belt (n) băng chuyền

* Checking : Matching

* Open prediction :

- What will they learn from this visit ?

- What are the steps in the manufacturing

process of chocolate ?

Steps:

First, beans are washed, weighed and

cooked

Then, the shells are removed

Next, the beans are crushed and liquified

After that, Cocoa is added along with sugar,

valilla and milk

Finally, the mixture is ground, rolled and

poured into molds

Model sentences

Beans are washed

Cocoa is added

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

3.Practice:

- Ss match (P.149)

4.Production:

- Ss discuss

- Give feedback

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

Ex: The mixture is ground

The shells are removed

* Matching :

E - a D - b C - c F - d

B - e A - f

* discussion

What are these things made from

Sugar...

Wine...

Butter...

Paper...

Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 97

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 16 : inventions

Lesson 1: speak + lf 3

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the inventions in the

past using the passive form

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

1,Warm – up:

- Ss chat

2.Pre- speaking :

- T presents

* Model sentences

3.while – speaking :

- Students ask and answer to fill the

missing information in the table

4.Post – speaking :

- Ss report back : the dialogue

- Ss do LF 3 (P.154-155)

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

* Chatting :

Do you know ...

who invented bicylcle ?

Who invented color T.V ?

Who invented helicopter ?

1. Vocabulary

- Facsimile (n) m¸y fax

- Reinforced concrete (n) Bê tông cốt thép

- Loudspeaker (n) Loa phóng thanh

- Helicopter (n) Máy bay trực thăng

- Optical fiber (n) Sỵi quang

* Matching : vocab

Model sentences:

S1: When was the first papermaking

machine invented ?

S2: It was invented in the late 1700s

S1: Who was it invented by ?

S2: It was invented by a Frenchman

* Gap filling :

S1: When was the

..invented ?

………

S2: It was invented in

………

.

S1: Who was it invented by ?

S2: It was invented by

………

..

*Write it up:

S1: When was the first papermaking

machine invented ?

S2: It was invented in the late 1700s

S1: Who was it invented by ?

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

Period : 98

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 16 : inventions

Lesson 2 : listen + lf 1

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for details and

revise the passive form

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss chat

2.Pre- listening:

* Preteach vocabulary

- Ss guess the gapfill (Listen .P.150)

3.While – listening :

- Ss listen and fill in the blanks

* chatting:

What is paper made from ?

When was the first papermaking machine

invented ?

Who was it invented by ?

1. Vocaculary

- Procedure (n) quá trình, các bớc

- pulp vat (n) bể, thïng chøa bét giÊy

- drain (v) rót níc, th¸o níc

- roller (n) con lăn

- smooth (v) làm nhẵn

- press (v) Ðp, Ên

* Matching : vocab

* Prediction :

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

- Students listen again then give their

answers

4.Post – listening :

* Language focus 1:

* Revise the passive form

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

4. rollers

*Ordering:

1. c - paper pulp was placed in the vat

2. d - Paper pulp was mixed with water

3. a - The water was drained

4. e- The pulp fibers were poured out

5. g - The pulp was conveyed under the

rollers

6. f- The fibers were smoothed and

pressed dry

7. b - The paper was put on a roll

* Change into passive :

1. The document was typed by Mrs

Quyen

2. The computer was repaired by Mr

Nhan

3. The picture was drawn by Ba

4. The lights were turned off by Hoa

5. The cake was baked by Lan

Let students do the exercises in the

workbook.

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 99

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 16 : inventions

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a poem about inventions

to understand the details and revise the passive form

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks, CD player and records,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

* Brainstorm

- Give feedback

2.Pre- reading :

* Preteach vocabulary

* Set the scene

* Open prediction : What machines are

mentioned in the poems ?

3.while – reading :

* Sts read the text then check their

predictions

* Matching

* gapfilling

- Students read again and then do the

exercise 1

4.Production:

- Ss discuss

- Give feedback

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

* The inventions you know :

-

The invention of the medicine

-

The invention of engine

-

The invention of telephone

-

The invention of paper

-

The invention of household

(microwave,

hairdryer,

dishwasher

…

)

-

The invention of TV

1.

vocabulary

be-doom, ping, chugga-chug, vroom, boom,

: những từ tợng thanh (âm của các vật đợc

phát ra)

A toaster

A microwave

A vacuum cleaner

A hairdryer

A dishwasher

A telephone

Read 1:

verse 1 - b

verse 2 - c

verse 3 - a

Read 2

a. vacuum

b. telephone

c. dishwasher

d. microwave

e. hairdryer

f. toaster

*Discussion:

What are the household appliances

mentioned in the poems used for ?

Eg: A microwave is used to cook or heat

food

Let students do the exercises in the

workbook

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

Period : 100

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

Unit 16 : inventions

Lesson 5 : Write + lf 4

I.The objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a process using the

sequence markers. ( The process of making chocolate or the process of producing white

rice in the traditional way

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

1,Warm – up:

- Ss rivise

2.Pre- writing :

* Preteach vocabulary

*Revision:

Sequence marker

- First - Then - next

- After that - Finally

1. vocabulary

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

* Matching

* gapfilling

* Ordering the pictures

3.while – writing :

- Students write the process of

manufacturing chocolate

4.Post – writing :

- Language focus 4

5.Home work:

- Give tasks

- chips (n) l¸t mỏng

- whiten (v) Làm trắng

- flatten (v) dát mỏng

- refine (v) läc trong, tinh chÕ

- thresh (v) ®Ëp (lóa)

- The mortar (n) cèi gi·

- winnow (v) sµng

- bran (n) c¸m

Answer key:

1. first 2. Then 3. next

4. After this 5. Finally

Answer key:

d - a - e- c - b - f

The fruit harvest is fermented for three to

nine days to kills the beans and turn them

down

The beans are dried in the sun

The beans are cleared in special machines

The beans are roasted to bring out the

chocolate flavor

They are shelled and ground to produce

chocolate liquor

The liquor is made into chocolate candy or

cocoa powder

First, The rice crop is harvested. Then the

rice plats are threshed to separate the grains

from the straw. Next, the rice grains are

husked in the mill to produce brown rice.

After this, the bran is removed in the

mortar and it is finally winnowed to

produce white rice

Let students do the exercises in the

workbook

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184>

Period : 101

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

revision

Lesson 1 : passive forms + participles

I.The objectives:

- Ss revise all the knowledge about :

+ Passive forms : be + PP

(in some tenses)

+ Participles : -ing and –ed participles

II.The teaching aids

:

- Text books, lesson plan, chalks,...

III. The teaching procedure:

A.Class organizing:

- Greetings

- Checking attendances

8A : /29

8B : /27

8C : /33

8D : /30

8E : /28

B.

New lesson:

Teacher’s and Students’

activities

- T asks Ss to revise all the

knowledge

I. Passive forms :

* Dạng thức của câu bị động : S + tobe + V

pp

* Câu bị động ở các thời :

Tenses

Structures

Present simple tense

S + is/are + P2

Past simple tense

S + was / were + P2

Future simple tense

S + will be + P2

Present progressive tense

S + is/ are + being + P2

Past progressive tense

S + was/ were + being + P2

Present perfect tense

S + has / have + been + P2

* Chuyển câu chủ động sang câu bị động :

- Đa tân ngữ của câu chủ động lên làm chủ ngữ của câu

bị động. Ta áp dụng sơ dồ sau :

Active:

S + V + O

Passive:

S + be + V

pp

+ by O

E.g: Active : We collect waste paper

Passive: Waste paper is collected by us

- Trong trêng hỵp nếu có 2 tân ngữ ( 1 trực tiếp, 1 gián

tiếp), muốn nhấn mạnh vào tân ngữ nào thì ngời ta đa nó

lên làm chủ ngữ(nhng thờng là tân ngữ gián tiếp làm chủ

ngữ).

</div>
(185)<div class='page_container' data-page=185>

I gave him a book.

hay I gave a book to him.

(Trong câu này book là tân ngữ trực tiếp, him là tân ngữ

gián tiếp, ta đổi:

He was given a book by me.

- Thời của động từ ở câu bị động phải tuân theo thời của

động từ ở câu chủ động.

* Notes : to be made

+tobe made of : đợc làm bằng - chỉ một vật đợc làm

bằng 1 thứ nguyên vật liệu.

Ex:This table is made of wood.

+tobe made from: đợc làm bằng - chỉ một vật đợc làm

bằng 2 thứ nguyên vật liệu trở lên.

+to be made out of: đợc làm bằng ( dùng cho thực

phẩm)

Ex:This cake is made out of flour, egg, butter and sugar.

II . –ing and –ed participles:

Hiện tại phân từ và quá khứ phân từ đứng sau danh từ

hoặc cụm danh từ để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ và cụm danh

từ đứng trớc nó

Ex:

The boy reading a book is Nam

- ing clause

The box painted red is 2 dollars.

- ed clause

- Prepare well for the next period

Period : 102

Date of preparing:

Date of teaching:

revision

Lesson 2 :

Progressive tenses + request with “mind”

1. Past progressive tense with “when” and “while”

2. Progressive tenses with “always”

</div>
(186)<div class='page_container' data-page=186>

giao an anh 8 bac giang

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 8

<b>The first semester</b>

Teaching date: 25 / 8 / 2008 .

<b> </b>

<b>consolidation </b>

<b>A / The aims:</b>

<b>B.Steps of the lesson : </b>

<b>Revision : </b>

<b>The tenses : </b>

<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>

Teaching date:

<b> </b>

<b>lesson 1 : Getting started</b>

<b> + language focus 1</b>

<b>A / The aims :</b>

<b>B. Steps of the lesson : </b>

<i><b> While </b></i>

–

<i><b> reading</b></i>

<b> : </b>

<b> </b>

<i><b>Post - reading</b></i>

<b> :</b>

<b>Consolidations: - Retell the main points of </b>

this lesson.

<b> Homeworks: </b>

<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>

Teaching date:

Period 3

<b> Lesson 2</b>

<b> : Speak + listen</b>

<b>A / The aims :</b>

<b>B/ Steps of the lesson : </b>

body build / hairs

<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>

Teaching date:

<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 3 :</b>

<b> Read</b>

<b>A /The aims : </b>

<b>B/ Steps of the lesson</b>

<b> :</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>

Teaching date:

<b> Lesson 4: </b>

<b>writing</b>

<b>A / The aims</b>

<b>B / Steps of the lesson : </b>

<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>

Teaching date

<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 5:</b>

<b>Language focus</b>

<b>A/ The aims :</b>

<b>B/ Steps of the lesson: </b>

<b>I. Organizations : Greeting and checking attendance .</b>

<b>II . Checking up : check in the new lesson and give them marks .</b>

<b>III. New lesson :</b>

<b>a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)</b>

<b>…</b>

<b>.</b>

<b>S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + ….</b>

<b>. (not) adjective + enough + to </b>

–

<b> infinitive</b>

<b>Exercises</b>

Unit 2

<b>Making arrangements</b>

Teaching date:

<b> </b>

<b>lesson 1 </b>

<b>: Getting started</b>

<b>A/ The aims: </b>

<b>B/ Steps of the lesson :</b>

<b>I. Organizations : - Greeting</b>

<b>II. Checking up: </b>

Unit 2

<b>Making arrangements</b>